GA TIENG ANH 4 4 TIET TUAN

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (11.29 MB, 241 trang )

(1)Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 WEEK: 1 Date of teaching: from 6 /9 to 10 /9 /2016 Period 1+ 2: UNIT 1: NICE TO SEE YOU AGAIN Lesson 1 I. Objectives: - After the lesson, students will be able to greet and respond someone formally. Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone, intro-duce someone. II. Language contents: - Vocabulary: morning, afternoon, evening, night - Grammar : Good morning/ Good afternoon/ Good evening/ Nice to see you again. III. Teaching aids: - Pupils' English 4 book 1, audio, recordings, computer, projector, picture… IV/ Procedures Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm up - Play the game. - Have Ss play the game: passing ball to introduce Class: What’s your name? themselves. S1: My name’s Nam. / I’m Nam. 1. Look, listen and repeat. - Identify the characters. - Ask Ss to identify the characters. Miss Hien Who is this? Students / pupils Who are they? - Listen and repeat. - Have Ss listen and repeat the short conversation - Play roles to read. One group between Miss Hien and her pupils. ( twice) repeats Miss Hien’s part and the - Have Ss play role to read the dialog in groups. other the pupils’ part. - Call some pairs to read the conversation. - Read in pairs. - Check Ss’ understanding: - Greet in chorus: T: Good morning, class. Good morning, Miss Ha. + Encourage Ss to say: Good morning, Miss Ha. 2.Point and say: - Ask Ss t look at the pictures a, b, c and d on page 6 - Identify the people in each to name people in each picture. Ask Ss to guess and picture: complete the speech bubbles. Picture a: Mss Hien and Mai. - Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step Picture b: Mr Loc and Phong. with some other pairs for pictures Picture c: Mr Loc and Mss Hien. - Have Ss work in pairs to play roles - Point to the pictures and - Do as an example with picture a. practise T: Good morning, Nga. S1: Good morning, Mr Loc. - Play role and speak out. - Do the same with other greetings and parts of the - Work in pair. day. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of - 6-7 pairs. The others observe the class. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases and give comments. in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(2) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 3. Listen and tick - Ask pupils to open their students’ books on page 7. - Ask them to look at pictures and say the names of the characters. - Play the recording twice and ask Ss to listen and tick. - Play the recording again and ask Ss to listen and check their answers. - Have Ss give the answers and correct. 4. Look and write. - Open their books. Identify the people and the parts of the day. - Listen to the teacher. Then Ss identify parts of the day. - Listen and tick. - Check . - Give the answers: 1. a ( Good morning) 3. c 2. b ( Good evening). -Have pupils look at the picture on their books. -Ask pupils what they do this part. -Tell them that they are going to complete the blank basing on looking at the pictures in each sentences -Have pupils work in pairs to complete the dialogue by looking at the pictures to fill in the blanks. -Call on a pupil to write on the board and other pupils write in the notebooks in individuals. -Have pupils trade their answers within in pairs for correction. -Have pupils comment the answer on the board. -Call some pupils read aloud their work in front of the class.. -Look at the picture -Listen -Work in pairs -Write in individuals -Trade for check -Comment -Read the result. -Read in chorus -Have the class chorally read each line. 5. Let’s sing - Introduce the song Good morning to you, Page 7. -Listen - Play the recording and listen the song Good morning to you. -Listen and repeat. - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each -Listen and clap line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and -Play roles in groups do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. Revision and homelink. - Listen and take notes - T repeats the sentence patterns. - Listen and remember - T makes a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the language Period 3+ 4: UNIT 1: NICE TO SEE YOU AGAIN. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(3) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Lesson 2 I. Objectives: After the lesson, students are able to say the sentences: Nice to meet you/ See you tomorrow/ See you later. - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone, intro-duce someone. - Revision: Greet and respond to formal greetings. II. Language contents: - Vocabulary: Goodbye/ bye, again, meet, tomorrow, good night, later - Grammar : A: It’s nice to meet you. B: Nice to meet you too. III. Teaching aids: - Pupils' English 4 book 1, audio, recordings, computer, picture… IV. Procedures Teacher’s work Students’ activities Warm up: Bingo - Listen. - Tell Ss: there are six words in the grid: ( good - Play the game: morning, good afternoon. Good evening, goodbye x x x and hello) x x x - Ask Ss to copy the grid down to their notebooks Look at the picture and answer and select six words at random to put them in the - Answer: Hoa and Miss Hien boxes. - Read the word and guess the - Call out the words until there is a pupil getting meaning. three words on a straight line crossed out and - Listen and repeat. calling Bingo! He or She is the winner. - Play roles to read. One group 1. Look, listen and repeat. repeats Miss Hien’s part and the - Ask Ss to open their books on P.10 other the pupils’ part. - Ask: Who are they? - Read in pairs. Have Ss listen and repeat the short conversation - Greet in chorus between Miss Hien and her pupils. ( twice) - Have Ss play role to read the dialogue in groups. - Identify the characters and the - Call some pairs to read the conversation. parts of the day. - Check Ss’ understanding: It’s nice to meet you/ - Practice using the word under Nice to meet you. each picture. 2. Point and say - Practice in pair. - Ask Ss to look at the picture - 6-7 pairs. The rest of the class - Say: “ You are going to practice greeting in observe and give comments different situations. ” - Have Ss work in pairs to practice. - Talk in pairs - Do picture a as a model. a. - Good evening/ good morning T: Goodbye. See you tomorrow. Nice to eet you.. S: Goodbye. See you later. b. – Goodbye. See you tomorrow. - Call some pairs to read in front of the class. - Goodbye. See you again. 3. Let’s talk - Have Ss look at the book and work in pairs to greet the parts of the day. - Look at the pictures in the book - Call on some students to show in front of the -Listen -Listen. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(4) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Listen and write class. - Check and correct. -Listen and check 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Give the identification of the -Answer characters in the pictures and the characters’ -Look at the picture words. -Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the -Listen recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. -Work in pairs - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. -Write in individuals - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: -Trade for check - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ -Comment comprehension of the listening text. -Read the result Answer:1. 2. 3. 4. 5.Look and write -Read in chorus. -Have pupils look at the picture on their books. -Ask pupils what they do this part. -Tell them that they are going to complete the blank basing on looking at the pictures in each sentences -Have pupils work in pairs to complete the dialogue by looking at the pictures to fill in the blanks. -Call on a pupil to write on the board and other pupils write in the notebooks in individuals. -Have pupils trade their answers within in pairs for correction. -Have pupils comment the answer on the board. -Call some pupils read aloud their work in front of the class.. -Have the class chorally read each line. 6. Let’s play. -Answer -Answer. -Divide groups -Play game. - Get the task.. -Ask pupils what they do this part. -Put the poster of game from Page 9 on the board. -Have pupils identify the words by the questions : What does it mean ? -Ask pupils to guess what they are doing. - Listen and take notes -Divide the class into two teams. - Listen and remember -Have the students play the game.. Revision and homelink. - T repeats the sentence patterns. - T makes a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the language. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(5) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017. V. Evaluation. ......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... \. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(6) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 WEEK:2 Date of teaching: from 12 /9 to 17 /9 /2016 Period 5+ 6: UNIT 1: NICE TO SEE YOU AGAIN Lesson 3 I. Objectives: After the lesson, students are able to: - Greet and respond to formal greetings. - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone, intro-duce someone. - Pronounce correctly the sound of the letters “ l ” and that of the letter “ n ”. II. Language contents: - Vocabulary: morning, afternoon, ......, England, Vietnam. - Grammar : Good morning, ........... III. Teaching aids: - Pupils' English 4 book 1, audio, recordings, computer, picture… IV. Procedures: Teacher’s work Students’ activities Warm up - Say greetings. - Respond. - Have Ss play the game: Slap the board. - Work in groups to play the evening game. good night afternoon morning 1. Listen and repeat. - Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words Linda and night -Introduce the sounds /l/ and /n/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read : Hello, Linda Good night -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after T - Have Ss learn to produce the sound of the letters “ l” in the word Linda and that of the letter “n” in the word Good night. 2. Listen and circle. Then write and say aloud. - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to circle . - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and circle. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils to write on the boad the sentences. - Check and correct.. - Identify the people and the parts of the day: Miss Hien, Nga and Linda, morning, afternoon. - Listen and repeat. - Read in groups./ in pairs.. - In individual - Some Ss reports the answer. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Read 2 sentences - Listen and circle. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - 4 Ss. The rest of the class write in the notebooks. Keys: 1. a 2. b 3.b 4. a. 3. Let’s chant. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(7) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Introduce the Chant Hello -Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. -Teacher reinforce their pronunciation. - Ps listen to the tape and chant Ps chant in group and individual. Ps chant and do the action.. 4. Read and answer. Whole class:- Have pupils turn their books to Page 11. -Tell pupils that they are going to read the student’s card to get the information in order to answer the questions bellow.. - Eliciting the meaning of the questions. -Pupils read the student’s card individually and do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. • Pairwork. -Have pupils trade their answers in pairs for the correction. -Call on some pupils to report their answers. -Make a few questions to check pupils' about the dialogue. - Give feedback: 1.Her name is Hoa 2.She’s from Viet nam 3.His name is Tony 4.He’s from Australia 5. Write about you. - Have pupils look at the table in their books.Tell pupils that they are going to write about their name,hometown and their school. - Pupils write individually the dialogues.. -Open the book. -Listen -Read and answer. -Trade for check -Answer the result -Play roles.. - Write. -Monitor the activity, and offer help when necessary. -Call on some pupils to write on the board and other pupils write in the notebooks in individuals. -Have pupils comment the answer on the board. -Call some pupils read aloud their work in front of the class.. -Look at the table.. -Write in individuals -Get help from the teacher -Answer -Trade for check -Comment -Read the result. 6. Project Make a card about yourself.Then look at your classmate’s card and tell the teacher about him/her. - Listen -Tell pupils that they are going to make a card about yourself.Show them to your friends. -Ss make their cards. -Monitor the activity, check the pronunciation -Work in individually (stress, assimilation of sounds and intonation), and offer help when necessary. -Give mark for their work(who has the best result Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(8) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Introduce the name card. -Ss Present them to class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation Revision and homelink. - T repeats the sentence patterns. - T makes a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the language. -Get help from teacher. - Listen and take notes - Listen and remember Periods 7+8: UNIT 2: I’M FROM JAPAN Lesson 1 I. Objectives: After the lesson, students are able to: - Asking where someone is from. - Respond to the question. Listen for specific information. - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone, intro-duce someone. II. Language contents: - Vocabulary: England; America; Australia; Vietnam; Malaysia; Japan - Grammar : Where are you from? - I’m from ..... III. Teaching aids: - Pupils' English 4 book 1, audio, recordings, computer, picture… IV. Procedures. Teacher’s work Students’ activities Warm up - Play the game in groups. - Have Ss play the game: nice evening ok Noughts and Crosses how again well 1. look , listen and repeat It’s later goodbye - Have ss look at the picture and identify the characters and what they are doing. - Identify the characters and the - Introduce the dialogue: They are going to listen to parts of the day. Nam and Akido talking about where they are from. - Play the recording . - Listen and repeat. - Play again , have ss listen and repeat. - Listen and repeat. - Elicit the new word and new sentence from Ss. - Give out and then note down. - Teach the new word and new sentence. Where are you from? - Ask ss give some more examples. I’m from England/ Japan. -Have ss read the dialogue. Give out. - Check some pairs. Read and check. 2. Point and say - Have ss look at the picture and identify the - Identify the characters. characters and what they are doing. - Give the meaning of some words - Repeat new words England; America; Australia - Note down. Vietnam; Japan: Malaysia - Ask Ss to imagine they are Hakim, ....Akio. They - Ss work in pair ask & answer introduce themselves and ask where their partner is - Identify the characters. from Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(9) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 a. Hi. I’m....Where are you from? b. Hi, I’m.... I’m from .... - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. 3. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures on page 13 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. - Play the recording 2 times. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 4. Look and write. - 6-7 pairs. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Indentify the characters in each picture. Guess the answer. - Ps listen & tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- - Listen and check Answer: 1.b 2.a 3.c. -Have pupils look at the picture on their books. -Ask pupils what they do this part. -Tell them that they are going to complete the blank basing on looking at the pictures in each sentences -Have pupils work in pairs to complete the dialogue by looking at the pictures to fill in the blanks. -Call on a pupil to write on the board and other pupils write in the notebooks in individuals. -Have pupils trade their answers with pairs for correction. -Have pupils comment the answer on the board. -Call some pupils read aloud their work in front of the class.. -Look at the picture -Listen -Work in pairs -Write in individuals -Trade for check -Comment -Read the result -Read in chorus. -Have the class chorally read each line. 5. Let’s sing -Listen - Introduce the song Where are you from? Page 13. - Play the recording and listen the song Where are -Listen and repeat. you from ? -Listen and clap - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. -Play roles in groups - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(10) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Revision and homelink. - T repeats the sentence patterns. - T makes a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the language. - Listen and take notes - Listen and remember. V. Evaluation. ......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... WEEK:3. Date of teaching: from 19 /9 to 24 /9 /2016 Period 9+ 10: UNIT 2: I’M FROM JAPAN Lesson 2 I. Objectives: After the lesson, students are able to: - Asking and answering questions about one’s nationality ”. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(11) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Listen and read for specific information. II. Language focus: - Vocabulary: nationality,American, Malaysian, Japanese, English, Australian. - Sentence patterns: What nationality are you?- I’m... III. Resources: - Pupils' English 4 book 1, audio, recordings, computer, picture… IV. Procedures Teacher’s work Students’ activities Warm up: - Have ss play the game: Jumbled letters. - Play the game: - Show ss words in which all the letters have got Chian China mixed up. Vienatm Vietnam - Have ss put the letters in the correct order to make a Jpaan Japan word. Engandl England - Call ss to give the answer. Amrieac America - Have ss read aloud all words. - Read in chorus. 1. Look, listen and repeat. - Have Ss to look at the book at page 14. - Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are Look at the pictures in the book saying. - Set the scene: we are going to ask and answer Listen and repeat questions about one’s nationality. - Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles - Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. - Read in groups. - Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Nam’ part. - Read in pairs. - Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. -Teach vocabulary: - Read after T. Then note down Nationality American Malaysian Japanese English Australian Vietnamese - Sentence: What nationality are you?- I’m... 2. Point and say - Have ss look at the picture and identify the characters. - Identify the people. - Say: “ You are going to practice answering the question What nationality are you?- I’m... - Listen to the T. - Do picture a as a model. - Practice in pairs. - Have Ss work in pairs to practice. - 6-7 pairs. Others observe and - Call some pairs to talk in front of the class. comment. 3. Let’s talk. Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions: + What’s your name? - Ss work in pairs. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(12) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 + Where are you from? + What nationality are you? Listen and correct. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 15 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. -Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5.Look and write. - Some Ss volumteer come to the class, the other give the comment. - Look at the pictures in the book -Listen -Listen - Listen and write. -Listen and check -Answer -Look at the picture -Listen -Write in individuals. -Have pupils look at the picture on their books. -Ask pupils what they do this part. -Tell them that they are going to complete the blank basing on looking at the pictures in each sentences -Have pupils work in pairs to complete the dialogue by looking at the pictures to fill in the blanks. -Call on a pupil to write on the board and other pupils write in the notebooks in individuals. -Have pupils trade their answers within in pairs for correction. -Have pupils comment the answer on the board. -Call some pupils read aloud their work in front of the class.. -Trade for check -Comment -Work in pairs -Read the result -Read in chorus -Answer -Answer. -Have the class chorally read each line. 6. Let’s play -Ask pupils what they do this part. -Put the poster of game from Page 15 on the board. -Have pupils identify the words by the questions : What does it mean ? -Ask pupils to guess what they are doing. -Divide the class into two teams. -Have the students play the game.. *Revision and homelink. - T repeats the sentence patterns. - T makes a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the language. -Divide groups -Play game. - Get the task.. - Listen and take notes - Listen and remember. Period 11+ 12: UNIT 2: I’M FROM JAPAN. Lesson 3 I. Objectives Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(13) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 By the end of this lesson, Ss wil revise what they learn in lesson 1, leson2 II. Language focus Phonics: j, v Vocabulary: Vietnamese, Enland,English, American, Australian, Vietnamese, Chinese,Japanese, Malaysian, Sentence Pattern: where are you from? I’m from…. What’s nationnality are you? I am….. III. Resources: - Pupils' English 4 book 1, audio, recordings, computer, picture… IV. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Student’s activities * Warm up * Warm up - play the game “ role play” - play the game 1. Listen and repeat 1. Listen and repeat - Tell Ss that they are going to practise saying the letters, - Listen to T words and sentences in t1. Listen and repeat he book. - Put the phonics letters j and v on the board and say them - Observe and listen a few times. - T plays the recording all the way through for Ss to listen - Listen and repeat and repeat a few time. Draw their attention to the target sounds. - Write the sentences on the board.Play CD a few times - Practise in groups and let Ss say sentences - T calls some SS to perform in front of the class. - Perform - T calls on a group to recite the chants. - Answer - Check as a class and correct the prounciation. 2. Listen circle. And say aloud 2. Listen and circle. And say aloud -Tell Ss that they are going to listen to CD,circle the correct options and write the words in the blanks. - Listen . -Give them a few seconds to read the sentences in silence and guess. - Read in silience -Have them listen to CD and circle.Give them time to do the task independently. - Listen to CD -Have Ss swap their answers before ckecking as a class.then tell them to say the sentences aloud. - Swap their answer 3. Let’s chant - Tell Ss to going to sing a chant - Have new words or structure if necessary . Check 3. Let’s chant comprehennsion. - Open their book . -Play the CD all the way through. Ask Ssto do chorol and - Listen to teacher’s instructions. individual repetition of the chant line by line.When Ss are - Listen to CD familiar with the tune,ask a group to in front of the class to - Repeat say the chant. - Say the chant - Have the class say the chant and clap their hands 4. Read and complete 4. Read and complete - Tell Ss that they are going to read the text and do the task Listen Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(14) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 that follows. -Complete the table -Let’s Ss to read the text, forcusing on the target information. -Give them time to do the task independently.Go around offering help if necessary. - Get Ss to swap their answer before checking as a class. 5. Let’s write - Tell Ss that they are going to w rite about them self to complete the dilogue. Let’s Ss to look at suggested sentences in silence. - Have Ss work in pairs to discuss what they are going to write. Give them time to do the task independently. Get Ss to swap their anwswers and read. 6. Project - Tell Ss that they are going to choose any country and nationality which they want and make a card about it then they share with your classmate’s card and retell the teacher. - Get Ss time to do the project in class. Get Ss to work in groups. Go around to offer help. - Call individual Ss to the front of the class to present - Have Ss stick their work on the walls of the classroom. * Revision and homelink. - Join Ss to sing the chant on page 10 to reinforcement their pronunciation, stress, rhythm and intonation. - Have Ss practise singing the chant on page 10 at home.. Indentify the information Read text Work in pairs Read their answer aloud. 5. Let’s write - Listen - Look at suggested sentences Work in pairs Do the task Read their answer aloud 6. Project - Listen - Work in groups - Some Ss present about their work - Post their work - Sing the chant. - Listen and remember.. V. Evaluation. ......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... WEEK:4 Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(15) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Date of teaching: from 26 /9 to 1 /10 /2016 Period 13+ 14: UNIT 3: WHAT DAY IS IT TO DAY? Lesson 1 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Pupils will be able to ask and answer questions about the days of the week. II. Language focus: * Vocabulary: Monday ,Tuesday,Wednesday,Thursday,Friday,Saturday,Sunday * Sentence Pattern: What day is it today? It’s…… III. Resources: - Audio, visual aids: recordings handmade puppets, flashcards, one large sized sheet of paper for the dialogue on page 18 , crayon, stickers. IV. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Student’s activities A. Warm up A. Warm up - sing the chant on page 16 - sing aloud B. New lesson B. New lesson 1. Look, listen and repeat 1. Look, listen and repeat - Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to - Open book and look at pictures page 18 and look at the pictures of the class. - Help them to identify the characters in the - Answer: Miss Hien and the pictures pupils. - Tell them that they are going to look at the - Listen and repeat dialogue in their Student’s book,listen to the recording and repeat the dialogue between Miss Hien and the pupils. - T plays the recording all the way through for - Listen pupils to listen. - T plays the recording again, pausing after - Listen and repeat each line for pupils to repeat .Repeat the step when necessary. - Divide the class into two groups. Ask one - Group A to repeat Miss Hien’s group to repeat Miss Hien’s part and the other part and the other the pupils’ the pupils’ part. part. - Check to make sure pupils can repeat and - Answer. understand the dialogue. 2. Point and say 2. Point and say - Ask Pupils look at Picture on page 18. Tell - Look at pictures them to identify the characters in each picture. - Answer by Vietnamese. - Ask pupils to identify the day s in picture. - Elicit new words and structure. - Answer: Good morning, Miss - Let’s Ss to read new words several times Minh. - Do the task with one pupil as an example. - Work in pairs to practice. - Ask pupils to work in pairs, one pupil ask - Some pairs of pupils to about the day and the other the responds. demonstrate the task in the front Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(16) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Repeat the step, but this time ask pupils to swap their roles . - Select some pairs of pupils to demonstrate the task in the front of the class. Monitor the activity, check pupils’ pronounciation and offer help when necessary. 3. Listen and tick. - Ask pupils to open their Students’ book on page 19. Tell them that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the correct answers. -Have them look at the picture to indentify the similarities and differences - Play the recording all the way through for pupils to listen as they read. - Play the recording again for pupils to listen to the recording and tick the correct answers. - Give them swap their anwers before T check as a class. Monitor the activity and offer help if necessary. 4. Look and write - Get them to identify the days in the pictures. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get the information to write the missing word(s) in sentences 1 and 2,3,4. - Ss read individually silently and complete the sentences .Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Ask Ss to trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction. - T asks some Ss to read their answers aloud to the class. - T makes a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. - T has the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation 5. Let’s sing. - T puts the piece of paper with the song from Page 19 written on it on the board. - T tells Ss that they are going to chant. - T plays the recording all the way through for Ss to listen as they read. Clap the syllables. - T plays the recording again for Ss to repeat each line of the chant and clap the syllables.. of the class. - Answer - Listen and remember. 3. Listen and tick. - Open their Students’ book and listen. - Listen to the recording. - Listen to the recording and tick the correct answers - Listen and check. - Work in pairs to exchange their answers - Write down the notebooks. . 4. Look and write. - Ss identify the days and their speech. - Ss listen. - Ss read and complete. - Ss trade. - The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Ss answer. - The whole class read each line. 5. Let’s sing. - Ss observe - Ss listen. - Ss listen. - Ss listen - One group repeats each line, the other clap the syllables. - Ss practise - The rest of the class observe and comment.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(17) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - T divides the class into two. One group - Ss answer. repeats each line of the chant, the other clap the syllables. - the whole class repeat Group work. Ss practise reciting the song in groups. - T calls on some volunteers to recite the song. - T has the whole class repeat the song to reinforce their pronunciation. * Revision and homelink. - T makes a few questions to check pupils’comprehension. - listen carefully - Ask Pupils to practise greeting and responding to formal or informal greetings to - remember each part of the day Period 15+ 16: UNIT 3: WHAT DAY IS IT TO DAY?. Lesson 2 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Pupils will be able to ask and answer question about weekly activities. II. Language focus * Vocabulary: go to shool,listen to music,go swimming,visit my grandparents * Sentence Pattern: - what do you do on....? I…… in the morning/in the afternoon III. Resources: - Pupils' English 4 book 1, audio, recordings, computer, picture… IV. Procedure Teacher’s activities Student’s activies * Warm up * Warm up - Ask pupils to sing “ we have english - let’s sing today”song. 1. Look,Listen and repeat 1. Look,Listen and repeat. -Ss open book. - Whole class. Books open. Turn to Page 20 of the Student Book. Have Ss look at - Ss listen the pictures. - T tells them they are going to listen to the dilogue - Ss listen. - Elicit the names of characters in the first picture and expalin what they say. - Ss listen CD - T plays the recording all the way through for Ss to listen. - Ss listen and repeat - Play the recording again for Ss listen - Do the task and repeat. - Listen and repeat - Do choral and individual repetition, - Answer pointing to the characters speaking. - Play the recording for Ss to listen and Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(18) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 say along. - T makes a few questions to check pupils’comprehension. 2. Point and say - Tell the class that they are going to practise ask and answer about weekly activities - Draw Ss’attention to the picture. Point to each charater - Point to the first picture and elicit the words to fill the gaps. Put the sentences on the board. - Divide the class into two groups to do choral and individual repetition. Repeat the procedure with the second picture - work in pair - call some SS to perfom in font of class 3. Let’s talk - Tell the class that they are going to practise more with their friends using their own names. - Draw Ss’ attention to the pictures and elicit the language that the characters might use. - Elicit the words to fill the gaps. Put the sentences on the board and do choral and individual repetition. - Get Ss to work in pairs. Go around to offer help, if necessary. - Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. 4. Listen and number - Ask Pupils to look at the pictures a, b, c and d on Page 21 of the Student Book. - Help them to identify wweekly activities in each picture. - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to four dialogues and number the correct pictures. - Play the recording through for pupils to listen. - Play the recording again for pupils to listen and do the task. - Play the recording once more for pupils. 2. Point and say - Listen - Look at the picture and character - Do the task - Work in groups to repeat - Work in pairs. 3. Let’s talk - Listen - Look at the picture - Do the task - Work in pairs - Pracise in front of class. 4.Listen and number - Look at the pictures - Answer - Listen instructions - Listen - Listen and do the task. - Listen and check. - Exchage their answers in pairs.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(19) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 to check their answers. - Ask pupils to exchage their answers with their partners before reporting them to the class. - Announce the answers to the class. Provide explanation(s) when necessary. 5. Look and write Tell Ss that they are going to read and fill the gaps with the appropriate words. - Ask Ss read the text in silence a few seconds. - Give Ss time to do the matching. Go around to offer help, if necessary. - Ask Ss exchange their answer with their partners before checking as a class. - Write the correct answers on the board for Ss to coppy down into their notebook. - Do choral and individual repetition of the sentence. 6. Let’s play - T explains how the” slap the board” game is - Ask SS to play in groups. - T reads any the days in week. Ss who slap quickly and have correct answer will get one point - which group has higher points will be a winner. * Revision and homelink. - T makes a few questions to check pupils’comprehension - Ask revise lesson. - Write down their notebook.. 5. Look and write - Re- Listen - Read the text in silence - Do the task - Exchange answer - Check and coppy down. 6. Let’s play - listen carefully Play the game. - listen carefully - Listen and remember. V. Evaluation.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(20) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 ......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... WEEK:5 Date of teaching: from 3 /10 to 8 /10 /2016 Period 17+ 18: UNIT 3: WHAT DAY IS IT TO DAY? Lesson 3 I. Objectives By the end of this lesson, Ss revise what they learned in the lesson 1,lesson 2 II. Language focus Phonics: ir,ur,er Vocabulary: Days of the week Sentence Pattern: What day is it today? It’s…. III. Resources Pupils' English 4 book 1, audio, recordings, computer, picture… Projector, textbook IV. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Student’s activities * Warm up * Warm up - play the game “ slap the board” - play the game * New lesson * New lesson 1. Listen and repeat 1. Listen and repeat - Tell Ss that they are going to practise saying - Listen to T the letters, words and sentences in t1. Listen and repeat - Put the phonics letters ir and ur, er on the - Observe and listen board and say them a few times. - T plays the recording all the way through for - Listen and clap their hand Ss to listen while they are reading the for Ss to listen while they are reading the chant on the board or their books. Clap the syllables. - T calls some SS to perform in front of the - Practise in groups class. - A group recite - T calls on a group to recite the sentences. - Answer - Check as a class and correct the prounciation. 2. Listen circle. Then write and say aloud 2. Listen and circle Then write and say -Tell Ss that they are going to listen to aloud CD,circle the correct options and write the words in the blanks. - Listen . -Give them a few seconds to read the sentences - read in silience in silence and guess. - Listen to CD -Have them listen to CD and circle.Give them - swap their answer time to do the task independently. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(21) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 -Have Ss swap their answers before ckecking as a class.Then tell them to say the sentences aloud. 3. Let’s chant - Tell Ss to going to sing a chant - Have new words or structure if necessary . Check comprehennsion. -Play the CD all the way through. Ask Ss to do chorol and individual repetition of the chant line by line. - Divide class into two groups. One chants the questions and the other chants the anwers. - When Ss are familiar with the tune,ask a group to in front of the class to say the chant. - Have the class say the chant and clap their hands 4. Read and anwer. - Tell Ss that they are going to read the text and do the task that follows. - Get them to look at the quetions under the text to indentify the information they need. Let’s Ss to read the text, forcusing on the target information. Give them time to do the task independently.Go around offering help if necessary. - Get Ss to swap their answer before checking as a class. 5. Write about you - Tell Ss that they are going to write about them self. Let’s Ss to look at suggested sentences in silence. - Have Ss work in pairs to discuss what they are going to write. Give them time to do the task independently. Get Ss to swap their anwswers and read. 6. Project - Tell Ss that they are going to interview one of their classmate what they do at the weekends. - Do an interview with Ss as a example. - Get Ss time to do the project in class. Get Ss to work in groups. Go around to offer help. - Call individual Ss to the front of the class to present - Have Ss stick their work on the walls of the. 3. Let’s chant - Open their book . - Listen to teacher’s instructions. - Listen to CD - Work in group - Repeat - Say the chant. 4. Read and anwer. Listen Indentify the information Read text Work in pairs Read answer aloud. 5. Write about you - Listen - Look at suggested sentences - Work in pairs - Do the task - Read their answer aloud 6. Project - Listen - Work in groups - Some Ss present about their work - Post their work. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(22) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 classroom. * Reinforcement and Home link * Reinforcement and Home link - Join Ss to sing the chant on page 10 to reinforcement their pronunciation, stress, - Sing the chant. rhythm and intonation. - Have Ss practise singing the chant on page 10 at home. - Listen and remember.. Period 19+ 20: Unit 4: When’s your birthday? Lesson 1 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer questions about the dates II. Language focus 1. Vocabulary: the first,the second,Jannuary, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November, December. 2. Sentence Pattern: - What is the date today? It’s ….. III. Resources:- Pupils' English 4 book 1, audio, recordings, computer, picture… IV. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Student’s activities * Warm up * Warm up - sing the chant “ What’s do you do on..?’’ on the - sing the chant page 22 * New lesson 1. Look, listen and repeat * New lesson - Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to 1. Look, listen and repeat page 24 and look at the picture of the class. - Open book and look at picture - Help them to identify the teacher and the pupils. - Answer: Miss Hien and the - Tell them that they are going to look at the pupils. dialogue in their Student’s book,listen to the - Listen and repeat recording and repeat the dialogue between Miss Hien and the pupils. - T plays the recording all the way through for pupils to listen. - Listen - T plays the recording again, pausing after each line for pupils to repeat .Repeat the step when - Listen and repeat necessary. - Divide the class into two groups. Ask one - Group A to repeat Miss Hien’s group to repeat Miss Hien’s part and the other part and the other the pupils’ the pupils’ part. part. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(23) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Check to make sure pupils can repeat and understand the dialogue. 2. Point and say - Ask Pupils look at Picture a, b, c on page 24. Tell them to identify the dates in each picture. -Elicit new words in the pictures - Let Ss to read new words several times - Do the task with one pupil as an example. - Ask pupils to work in pairs, one pupil asks and the other the responses. Repeat the step, but this time ask pupils to swap their roles . - Select some pairs of pupils to demonstrate the task in the front of the class. Monitor the activity, check pupils’ pronounciation and offer help when necessary. 3. Listen and tick. - Ask pupils to open their Students’ book on page 25. Tell them that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the correct answers. -Have them look at the picture to indentify the similarities and differences - Play the recording all the way through for pupils to listen as they read. - Play the recording again for pupils to listen to the recording and tick the correct answers. - Give them swap their anwers before T check as a class. Monitor the activity and offer help if necessary. 4. Look and write - Get them to identify the dates in the pictures. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get the information to write the missing word(s) in sentences 1 and 2,3. - Ss read individually silently and complete the sentences .Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Ask Ss to trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction.. - Answer. 2. Point and say - Look at pictures - Answer by Vietnamese. - Work in pairs to practice. - Some pairs of pupils to demonstrate the task in the front of the class. - Answer - Listen and remember.. 3. Listen and tick. - Open their Students’ book and listen. - Listen to the recording. - Listen to the recording and tick the correct answers - Listen and check.. - Work in pairs to exchange their answers - Write down the notebooks. 4. Look and write. - Ss identify the dates and their speech. - Ss listen.. - Ss read and complete.. - Ss trade.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(24) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - T asks some Ss to read their answers aloud to the class. - T makes a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. - T has the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation 5. Let’s sing. - T puts the piece of paper with the song on the Page 25 written on it on the board. - T tells Ss that they are going to chant. - T plays the recording all the way through for Ss to listen as they read. Clap the syllables. - T plays the recording again for Ss to repeat each line of the song and clap the syllables. - T divides the class into two. One group repeats each line of the song, the other clap the syllables. Group work. Ss practise reciting the song in groups. - T calls on some volunteers to recite the song. - T has the whole class repeat the song to reinforce their pronunciation. * Reinforcement and home link - T makes a few questions to check pupils’comprehension. - Ask Pupils to practise greeting and responding to formal or informal greetings to each part of the day. - The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Ss answer. - The whole class read each line. 5. Let’s sing. - Ss observe - Ss listen. - Ss listen. - Ss listen - One group repeats each line, the other clap the syllables. - Ss practise - The rest of the class observe and comment. - Ss answer. - the whole class repeat. * Reinforcement and home link - listen carefully - remember. V. Evaluation. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(25) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 ......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... WEEK:6. Date of teaching: from 10 /10 to 15 /10 /2015 PERIOD 21+ 22: UNIT 4: WHEN’S YOUR BIRTHDAY? Lesson 2. I.Objects: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer questions about someone’birthday II. Language focus 1. Vocabulary: Jannuary, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November, December. 2. Sentence Pattern: - When’s your birthday? + It’s on the..... III. Resources:- Computer, CD, projector, textbook IV. Procedure Teacher’s activities Student’s activies *. Warm up - Ask pupils to sing “ what’s the date today” song on the page 25 *. Newlesson 1. Look,Listen and repeat. - Whole class. Books open. Turn to Page 26 of the Student Book. Have Ss look at the pictures. - T tells them they are going to listen to the dilogue - Elicit the names of characters in the first picture and expalin what they say. - T plays the recording all the way through for Ss to listen. - Play the recording again for Ss listen and repeat. - Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking. - Play the recording for Ss to listen and say along. - T makes a few questions to check pupils’comprehension. 2. Point and say - Tell the class that they are going to practise ask and answer about someone’ birthday.. *. Warm up - sing the song *. Newv lesson 1. Look,Listen and repeat -Ss open book. - Ss listen. - Ss listen. - Ss listen CD - Ss listen and repeat - Do the task - Listen and repeat - Answer 2. Point and say - Listen. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(26) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Draw Ss’attention to the pictures. Point to each date - Point to the first picture and elicit the words to fill the gaps. Put the sentences on the board. - Divide the class into two groups to do choral and individual repetition. Repeat the procedure with the second picture - work in pair - call some SS to perfom in font of class 3. Let’s talk - Tell the class that they are going to practise more with their friends using their own names. - Draw Ss’ attention to the pictures and elicit the language that the characters might use. - Elicit the words to fill the gaps. Put the sentences on the board and do choral and individual repetition. - Get Ss to work in pairs. Go around to offer help, if necessary. - Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. 4. Listen and number - Ask Pupils to look at the pictures a, b, c and d on Page 27 of the Student Book. - Help them to identify the date in each picture. - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to four dialogues and number the correct pictures. - Play the recording through for pupils to listen. - Play the recording again for pupils to listen and do the task. - Play the recording once more for pupils to check their answers. - Ask pupils to exchage their answers with their partners before reporting them to the class. - Announce the answers to the class. Provide explanation(s) when necessary. 5. Look and write Tell Ss that they are going to read and fill the gaps with the appropriate words. - Ask Ss read the text in silence a few seconds.. - Look at the picture and character - Do the task - Work in groups to repeat. - Work in pairs. 3. Let’s talk - Listen - Look at the picture - Do the task. - Work in pairs - Pracise in front of class. 4.Listen and number - Look at the pictures - Answer - Listen instructions - Listen - Listen and do the task. - Listen and check. - Exchage their answers in pairs. - Write down their notebook.. 5. Look and write - Re- Listen. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(27) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Give Ss time to do the matching. Go around to - Read the text in silence offer help, if necessary. - Do the task - Ask Ss exchange their answer with their partners before checking as a class. - Exchange answer - Write the correct answers on the board for Ss to coppy down into their notebook. - Check and coppy down - Do choral and individual repetition of the sentence. 6. Let’s chant - T puts the piece of paper with the chant on the 6. Let’s chant Page 27 written on it on the board. - Ss observe - T tells Ss that they are going to chant. - T plays the recording all the way through for Ss to - Ss listen. listen as they read. Clap the syllables. - Ss listen. - T plays the recording again for Ss to repeat each - Ss listen line of the chant and clap the syllables. - One group repeats each line, the - T divides the class into two. One group repeats other clap the syllables. each line of the song, the other clap the syllables. - Ss practise Group work. Ss practise reciting the chant in groups. - The rest of the class observe and - T calls on some volunteers to recite the chant comment. - T has the whole class repeat the chant to reinforce - Ss answer. their pronunciation. *.Reinforcement and homelink. - the whole class repeat - T makes a few questions to check *.Reinforcement and homelink. pupils’comprehension - Listen carefully - Ask revise lesson - Listen and remember PERIOD 23+ 24: UNIT 4: WHEN’S YOUR BIRTHDAY? Lesson 3 I. Objectives: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about their friend’s birthday. II. Language focus: -Phonics: th , ch - Vocabulary: fourth , march, fifth, first, second. - Sentence Pattern: when’s your birthday? It’s on … III. Resources: - Computer, CD, textbook, projector IV. Procedure: Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(28) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Teacher’s activities * Warm up: - sing the chant “ Months of the year” *. New lesson 1. Listen and repeat - Tell Ss that they are going to practise saying the letters, words and sentences. Listen and repeat he book. - Put the phonics letters th and ch on the board and say them a few times. - T plays the recording all the way through for Ss to listen while they are reading the for Ss to listen while they are reading the chant on the board or their books. Clap the syllables. - T calls on a group of six to the front of the class. - T calls on a group to recite the chants. - T makes a few questions to check Ss’comprehension. 2. Listen circle. Then write and say aloud -Tell Ss that they are going to listen to CD,circle the correct options and write the words in the blanks. -Give them a few seconds to read the sentences in silence and guess. -Have them listen to CD and circle.Give them time to do the task independently. -Have Ss swap their answers before checking as a class.then tell them to say the sentences aloud. 3. Let’s chant - Tell Ss to going to sing a chant - Have new words or structure if necessary . Check comprehennsion. -Play the CD all the way through. Ask Ssto do chorol and individual repetition of the chant line by line.When Ss are familiar with the tune,ask a group to in front of the class to say the chant. - Have the class say the chant and clap their hands 4. Read and tick. - Tell Ss that they are going to read the text and do the task that follows.. Student’s activities * Warm up: - sing the chant. *. New lesson 1. Listen and repeat - Listen to T. - Observe and listen - Listen and clap their hand - Practice in groups - A group recite - Answer 2. Listen and circle Then write and say aloud - Listen . - read in silience - Listen to CD - swap their answer. 3. Let’s chant - Open their book . - Listen to teacher’s instructions. - listen to CD - Repeat - say the chant. 4. Read and tick. Listen. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(29) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Get them to look at the quetions under the text to indentify the information they need. Let’s Ss to read the text, forcusing on the target information. Give them time to do the task independently.Go around offering help if necessary. - Get Ss to swap their answer before checking as a class. 5. Write an invitation card - Tell Ss that they are going to write an invitation. - Let’s Ss to look at suggested sentences in silence. - Have Sswork in pairs to discuss what they are going to write. - Give them time to do the task independently. - Get Ss to swap their anwswers and read. 6. Project - Tell Ss that they are going to make a birthday card.then look at your classmate’s card and retell the teacher. - Get Ss time to do the project in class. Get Ss to work in groups. Go around to offer help. - Call individual Ss to the front of the class to present - Have Ss stick their work on the walls of the classroom. *. Reinforcement and home link - Join Ss to sing the chant on page 28 to reinforcement their pronunciation, stress, rhythm and intonation. - Have Ss practise singing the chant on page 28 at home.. Indentify the information Read text Work in pairs Read answer aloud. 5. Write an invitation card - Listen - Look at suggested sentences Work in pairs Do the task Read their answer aloud 6. Project - Listen - Work in groups - Some Ss present about their work - Post their work *. Reinforcement and home link - Sing the chant. - Listen and remember.. V. Evaluation. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(30) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 ......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... WEEK:7. Date of teaching: from 17 /10 to 22 /10 /2016. Period 25: Unit 5: Can you swim? Lesson 1- Parts 1, 2 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to: - Use the words and phrases related to the topic Activities. - Ask and answer questions about what someone can/ cannot do. II. Language focus. Vocabulary : can, ride, cook, skate, skip, sing, swim. Sentence pattern: What can you do? I can……………. III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: audio, recordings, chalk, book , pictures….. 2. Students’: student’s book, notebook, pen, …. IV. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Student’s activities 1. Warm up. - Ask Ps sing the chant “ When’s your birthday?”. 2. Look, listen and repeat. - Tell Ps that they are going to talk about the what someone they can/ can not do, using What can you do?. Point the first picture and elicit the name of the characters, and what they are saying. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture, the third picture and the fourth picture. - Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking. - Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. 3. Point and say. - Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering the questions using What can. - Read the chant.. - Listen to teacher to know the request of the task. Look at the first picture and elicit the characters here. Do the same with the second, third, fourth pictures. Repeat the text a few times.. - Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking. - Listen and say along.. - Look at the pictures and read the text.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(31) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 you do? I can + ( activities). Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures and read the text in silence. - Have Ps repeat the new words and sentences pattern a few times: + Can, skate, ride, cook, skip. + What can you do? I can sing - Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the sentence on the board. Have Ps repeat it a few times. - Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book. - Get Ps to practice in pairs. Check as a class. 4. Reiforcement. - Ask Ps some questions about the lesson to check their comprehension. - Repeat new words and sentences pattern.. - Look at the board and repeat. - Repeat the sentence in choral and individual. - Practice in pairs and then some pairs show to the class. - Answer the questions.. Period 26: Unit 5 - Can you swim? Lesson 1- Parts 3, 4, 5 I. Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to: - Listen and tick the correct the pictures. - Look at the pictures and write the missing words. Play “ guessing game”. II. Language focus: - Vocabulary: Review - Sentence patterns: Review III. Resources 1. Teacher’s: audio, recordings, chalk, book , pictures….. 2. Students’: student’s book, notebook, pen, …. IV. Procedures Teacher’s activities Student’s activities 1. Warm up - Play the Slap the board game. - Get Ps to play the Slap the board game, using the vocabulary learnt : ride, cook, skate, skip, sing, swim. - Listen and look at the pictures. 2. Listen and tick. Then give feedback. - Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Elicit the name of each Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(32) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 character and what they can/ can not do. Give feedback. - Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers. - Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. * Key: 1- a , 2- c ,3- a. 3. Look and write. - Tell Ps that they are going to look at the pictures and complete the sentences. Give a few second for Ps to look at the pictures and read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback. - Elicit the words to complete the sentences. - Remind Ps sentence pattern:” What can you do? I can……………..”. - Get Ps to swap and check their answers before calling four pupils go to the board read aloud the sentences. - Write the correct answers on the board for Ps copy down into their notebooks. * Key: 1: dance, 2: skate, 3: swim, 4: ride a bike. 4. Let’s play. *Guessing game - Get Ps to turn to their Student’s book on page 31. Tell Ps they are going to play a guessing game. Get them to look at the picture and answer the question to guess animal. - Make sure that Ps understand the language and how to play game. They should work in pairs and take turn to select the pictures, ask and answer questions to guess the animal. Do example with a Ps. - Ask Ps work in pair. Ps take turn to select pictures, ask and answer questions to find out the animals. Set time and monitor the activity. - Call on some pairs to act out the game in front of the class.. - Listen and do the task. - Check answers.. - Look at the pictures and complete the sentences.. - Complete the sentences. - Listen. - Check answers.. - Write answers.. - Listen.. - Listen and do example.. - ¦Work in pair.. - Act out the game in front of the class.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(33) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 5. Reinforcement - Ask Ps answer the question: “ What can you do?”. - Answer the question. - Listen and remember. Period 27:. Unit 5. Can you swim?. Lesson 2: Parts 1- 2- 3 I. Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to: Asking and answering questions about whether someone can do something. II. Language focus Vocabulary: Play, guitar, piano, volleyball, table tennis, chess. Sentences pattern: Can you………..? Yes, I can. / No, I can’t. III. Resources 1. Teacher’s: audio, recordings, chalk, book , pictures….. 2. Students’: student’s book, notebook, pen, …. IV. Procedures Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up - Play the sleep- wake up game. - Let Ps play the sleep – wake up game. Teacher writes down some sentences on the board and then asks Ps to sleep. When Ps sleep, teacher wipes one or more words in the sentences. When teacher says Wake up, Ps look at the sentences and read aloud the missing words. Teacher can ask them to read the whole sentences. 1. What can you do? 2. I can skate. 3. I can’t play the piano. 2. Look, listen and repeat. - Tell Ps that they are going to ask and answer the question “ Can you + activities?” “Yes, I can- No, I can’t”. Give a few - Look at the pictures and read the seconds for Ps to look at the pictures and read text the text. - Check comprehension and give feedback. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(34) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking. - Play the recording a few times and ask Ps repeat. - Ask Ps to practice in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. 3.Point and say. - Ask Ps look at the pictures a, b, c, d and read the words under them. - Pre- teach the new words and sentences: table tennis, volleyball, play the piano, play the guitar. * Sentences patterns: “ Can you + activities?” “Yes, I can- No, I can’t”. - Ask Ps repeat the new words a few times. - Tell Ps that they are going to practice in pairs with pictures a, b, c, d. - Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book. - Get Ps to practice in pairs. Check as a class. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. 4. Let’s talk. - Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Give Ps a few seconds to practice with friends in the class. - Get Ps practice a few times. Go around to offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary. - Call a few Ps practice in front of the class. 5. Reinforcement - List all the activities that Ps can do and Ps can’t do.. - Repeat the text a few times. - Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking. - Listen and repeat. - Practice. - Practice.. - Look at the pictures read the words. - Listen and repeat the new words.. - Listen and repeat.. - Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book. - Work in pairs. - Practice.. - Listen and practice.. - Practice. Period 28 : Unit 5: Can you swim? Lesson 3 (4, 5, 6) I. Objectives: Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(35) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to: - Listen and number the correct pictures. - Complete the answers. - Sing the song. II. Language focus: * Vocabulary: (review) * Sentence patterns: (review) III. Resources 1. Teacher’s: audio, recordings, chalk, book , pictures….. 2. Students’: student’s book, notebook, pen, …. IV. Procedures Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up - Ask Ps answer some questions. 1. What can you do? 2. Can you play the piano? 3. Can you play football. 2. Listen and number. - Ask Pupils to look at the pictures and answer the question : + How many pictures are there? + What are they? - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to four dialogues and number the correct pictures. - Play the recording through for pupils to listen. - Play the recording again for pupils to listen and do the task. - Play the recording once more for pupils to check their answers. - Ask pupils to exchange their answers with their partners before reporting them to the class. - Announce the answers to the class. Provide explanation(s) when necessary. 3. Look and write. - Tell Ps that they are going to read the text then answer the questions. Give Ps a few seconds to look at the pictures and read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback. - Give Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help,if necessary. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. Students’ activities - Answer:. - Listen to T’s instructions - Listen carefully - Listen and do the task. - Listen and check. - Exchange their answers in pairs.. - Write down on the notebook. Keys: a-2 b- 4 c- 3 d- 1. - Look at the pictures and read the text in silence. Give the meaning of the request and text to show the comprehension. - Do the task individually. - Check the answers and then show it to the class..

(36) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down into their notebooks. - Call some pairs to practice ask and answer about picture 1, 2, 3, 4. 4. Let’s sing. - Tell Ps that they are going to sing the song “ Can you swim? - Ask Ps look at the song on the board. - Read the song and have Ps to repeat each line - Play each line of the song and get Ps to repeat after the recording. Repeat this step a few times for Ps to get familiarized with the pronunciation, the stress, the rhythm and the tune of the song. - Play the recording again and get Ps to sing along with the recording. - Get Ps to sing the song without the music - Call some Ps to sing the song to the class. 5. Reinforcement - comments all unit.. Listen to the correct answers and explanations from teacher. Copy down it into notebooks. - Listen - Look at the song on the board - Listen and repeat - Listen to recording and repeat - Sing along with the recording - Sing the song in chorus - Some Ps sing the song in the front of the class. Others clap at the rhythm. V. Evaluation. ......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(37) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017. WEEK:8. Date of teaching: from 24 /10 to 29/10 /2016 Period 29+30 : UNIT 5: CAN YOU SWIM? Lesson 3 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Pronounce correctly the sound of the letters “s ” and “sw” in the word sing and swim - Use the words and phrases related to the topic Things we can do. - Ask and answer questions about what someone can/ cannot do, using what can you do? I can…….. + Can you ……? Yes, I can (No, I can’t) - Develop Ss listening, speaking, reading and writing skills II. Language focus: -Phonics: “ s ” and “sw” III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Procedures. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Warm up: - Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson by calling some pupils to the front of the class to sing the song Can you swim? Have the class listen and clap their hands. 2. Activities. 2.1. Listen and repeat. - Tell Ss that they are going to practise saying the sounds of the letters s and sw in the words sing and Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. - Ps sing the song Can you swim? - The class listen and clap their hands 1. Listen and repeat. - Identify:.

(38) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 swim respectively - First, put the letters s and sw on the board. - Play the recording and ask Ss to repeat a few times. - Then write the words sing and swim on the board. Play the recording a few times. After that, write the sentences I can sing and I can swim on the board. - Play the recording a few times and let Ss say the words and phrases, paying attention to the target sounds. - Do choral and individual repetition of the sounds - Get some Ps to perform in front of the class 2.2. Listen and number. Then say aloud. - Tell Ss that they are going to listen to 4 sentences with the sound s and sw and number them. - Asks them to read the sentences and identify the word with the letter s and sw. Explain new word swing. - Play the recording for pupils to listen and number the sentences. Remind Ps ton focus on the words with the sounds s and sw while listening. - Play the recording again for them to check their answers. - Get Ps to swap their answers before checking as a class. Go around and offer help, if necessary. - Ask Ps to read the sentences aloud . Key: a- 4 b- 1 c-2 d-3. 2.3. Let’s chant. -Tell them that they are going to say the chant. -Have them read chant and check comprehension. - Play the recording more than once, if necessary, for pupils to do choral and individual repetition of the chant until they get familiarized with the pronunciation, the stress, the rhythm and intonation of the chant. Show Ps how to chant and do actions. Divide the class into groups of four and call two groups to give a demonstration: one group chants the questions, the other chants the answers. - Get groups to sit opposite of each other and practice chanting and do action. Go around offering helf, if necessary. - Call three groups to the class to chant and do actions. The rest of the class clap along to the rhythms. 2.4. Read and complete. -Tell pupils that they are going to read the text about Mai and her friends Nam and Phong and write their Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. - Listen. - Ss pay attention to the letters coloured differently. - Ss to repeat each line of the text in chorus. - Read in groups./ in pairs. - The rest of the class listen and give comments 2.Listen and number. Then say aloud. - Read 4 sentences.. - Ss listen and number. - Call 3- 5 Ps the answer. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Listen and check - Change their answers. - Read the sentences aloud. 3. Let’s chant. - Listen chant. - Listen and repeat - Chant in groups./ in pairs.. - Pupils chant the whole chant. - The rest of the class clap their hands at rhythms. 4. Read and complete..

(39) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 names under the pictures. Explain the meaning of V and X in the pictures. Check understanding. Have pupils read the first three lines of the passage and explain why we put Mai under the third pair of pictures. - Get them to read the text and focus on the information to complete the blanks. If necessary, get pupils to work in pairs or small groups. - Give pupils time to do the task independently. Go around to offer help, if necessary. - Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. Provide explanations to the answers, if necessary. Key: 1. Nam 2.Phong 2.5. Write about yourself. - Tell pupils that they are going to write a short paragraph about what they can and cannot do, following the structure of the given text. - Tell pupils that the given text is an article from a blog. Ask pupils to read the blog to understand what Linda writes about herself: her name, what she can do and what she cannot do. - Have them work in pairs or groups to discuss what they are going to write. Then give them time to do the task independently. Go around to offer help, if necessary - Get pupils to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. - If there is time, ask one pupil to write the answers on the board. Key: Pupils’ own answers 2.6. Project. - Tell pupils that they are going to interview three classmates to get information about their abilities and complete the chart. Ask pupils to pay attention to the sample sentences in the bubbles. Check their understanding of the symbols of the chart. - Get a pair to do a demonstration in front of the class as an example before starting the activity. - Give pupils time to do the interview in class. - Call some pupils to the front of the class to report on their work. Key: Pupils’ own answers 3. Reinforcement. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. - Open the book and listen. - Pupils look at the pictures and guess - Do the task individually. - Exchange their answers - Report their answers. 5. Write about yourself. - Read and do - Whole class. - Pair work/group work - Individual - Exchange their answers - The rest of the class listen and give comments. 6. Project. - Whole class - Pair work - Individual - Some pupils to the front of the class to report on work..

(40) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Tell the content of the lesson. - Practise with their friends about can or can’t 4. Homelink. - Prepare the next period Period 31. REVIEW 1. I. Objectives: By the end of this unit, pupils can - Listen and identify specific information related to the theme Me and my friends. - Read and identify specific information related to the theme Me and my friends. - Use simple sentences to write about themselves. - Read, listen to and understand a short story. II. Language focus: - Vocabulary: - Sentence patterns III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Procedures. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(41) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 1.Warm up: Net work game. - Have Ps find the words and put in to the right group - Check some groups. 2. Activities. 2.1. Listen and tick. - Tell Ss that they are going to listen to five dialogues and tick the correct pictures. - Give them a few second to look at the pictures. Ask them identify the similarities and differences among them.Checking understanding. - Play the recording three times for pupils to listen, do the task and check the answers./ - Get pupils to swap their answers before check as a class. Explain the answers and give further support to pupils who get more than half of the answers wrong. Key: 1- b; 2- b; 3- b; 4- c; 5- a 2.2. Read and write. - Tell pupils that they are going to read the text and write the answers to the questions. - Give a few seconds for Ps to read the text in silence. Check comprehension. - Give Ps time to do the task (2minutes) - Do choral and individual repetition of the text Key: 1. She’s from England. 2. She’s nine years old. 3. She can play the guitar and sing many Vietnamese songs. 4. She goes to the Music Club. 2.3. Read and match. - Tell pupils that they are going to read the sentences on the left and pair them with those on the right by drawing a line between them. Checking the understanding. - Give them time to do the task independently. - Get pupils to swap their answers before check as a class. Provide explanations, if necessary. - Have a few pairs act out dialogues. Key: 1- d; 2- a; 3- e; 4- c; 5- b. 2.4. Look and write. Then say. - Teacher tell pupils that they are going to look at the pictures and write about the character Tom. - Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the. - Work in groups of 5. Greeting Country Nationality. 1. Listen and tick. - Ss look and indentify the charaters in the pictures. - Listen and tick. Compare the answer with the partner - Ss listen and check answers. 2. Read and write. - Ss look at pictures and identify. - Ss listen - Ss do the task. - Read the text aloud. 3. Read and match. - Pupils read the sentences individually and do the task. - Practise. - Swap answers - Answer - Read 4. Look and write. Then say.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(42) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 pictures to get some information about Tom. - Check comprehension and elicit the words to fill the gaps and give feedback. - Get them to work in pairs. Monitor the activity and offer help, if necessary. - Select some pairs to say the sentences about Tom in front of the class. Key: 1- America; 2- the fifteenth of January; 3play badminton; 4- Sunday 2.5.Write about you. - Tell pupils that they are going to complete a paragraph about themselves, using word cues. - Ask them to look at the incomplete sentences to identify information needed to fill the gaps. Then ask them to think of possible words or phrases to complete the sentences. - Give Ps time to do the task independently. - Get pupils to swap their answers before check as a class. Go around offering help, if necessary. - If there is enough time, call some Ps to read paragraphs aloud. Key: Pupils’ own answers 3. Reinforcement. - Have Ps review the lesson and prepare the next lesson. 4. Homelink. - Prepare for new lesson.. - Ss look at the pictures, identify the characters and guess the content - Pupils listen. - Work in pairs - Ss exchange - Ss answer -Some pairs to say the sentences about Tom in front of the class. 5.Write about you. - Ps look at the incomplete sentences to identify information. - Do the task independently.. - Pupils swap their answers. - Some Ps read paragraphs aloud.. - Pupils remember. Perid 32 - REVIEW I. Objectives - To help Ss to do exercises relating to the vocabularies and the sentence patterns in unit 1, unit 2 and unit 3. II. Language focus * Vocabulary: morning, afternoon, evening, night, tomorrow, later, again, see, meet, Viet Nam, England, America, American, Australia, Australian, English, Japan, Japanese, Malaysia, Malaysian, Vietnamese, today, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Sunday (review) * Sentence Pattern: (review) - Good morning/ afternoon/ evening. - Nice to see you again. - Goodbye/ Bye/ Good night. - See you tomorrow/ See you later. - Where are you from? I'm from ............... . - What nationality are you? Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(43) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 I'm ........................ . - What day is it today? It's ............ . - What do you do on+ (name of the day)? I ................... in the morning/ afternoon. III. Resources - Audio and visual aids, recordings, flashcards, computer, projector. IV. Proceduce Teacher’s activities Student’s activities 1. Warm up: Sing the song Where are you from? - Show the song. - Look at the board. - Play the recording. - Listen, sing along . - Ask: What does the song talk about? - Answer: - Present the new lesson. 2. New lesson I. Vocabulary 1. Unit 1 - Show the pictures and ask the questions: - Look at the pictures and answer the questions. - Write the words on the board. - Look at the words and read. morning, afternoon, evening, night, - Read individually. tomorrow, later, again, see, meet, Viet Nam, - Write down in the notebooks. England 2. Unit 2 - Show the pictures and ask the questions: - Look at the pictures and answer the questions. - Write the words on the board. - Look at the words and read. America, American, Australia, Australian, - Read individually. English, Japan, Japanese, Malaysia, Malaysian, Vietnamese 3. Unit 3 - Show the pictures and ask the questions: - Look at the pictures and answer the questions. - Write the words on the board. - Look at the words and read. today, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, - Read individually. Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Sunday * Look at the pictures and unscramble the - Look at the pictures and do the words. task. 1.ldangen................ 5. awsedeynd.................. 2. pnaja .................... 6. fdyair ................ 3. aaayimls ............. 7. usrhtyad................. 4. utliasaar ................ 8. suetayd .................. - Set the time. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(44) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Call on some Ss to do on the board. - Ask Ss to change the notebooks to check . II. Sentence Patterns 1. Unit 1 - Show the pictures and answer the questions? + Greeting and responding to greetings formally. + Saying and responding to goodbye. - Write the sentences on the board. - Good morning/ afternoon/ evening. - Nice to see you again. - Goodbye/ Bye/ Good night. - See you tomorrow/ See you later. * Have Ss work in pairs to practice. - Set the time. - Call on some pairs to perform the task in front of the class. 2. Unit 2 - Show the pictures and answer the questions? + Asking and answering questions about where someone is from. + Asking and answering questions about one's nationality. - Write the sentences on the board. - Where are you from? I'm from ............... . - What nationality are you? I'm ........................ . * Have Ss work in pairs to practice. - Set the time. - Call on some pairs to perform the task in front of the class. 3. Unit 3 - Show the pictures and answer the questions? + Asking and answering questions about the days of the week. + Asking and answering questions about weekly activities. - Write the sentences on the board. - What day is it today? It's ............ . - What do you do on+ (name of the day)? I ................... in the morning/ afternoon. * Have Ss work in pairs to practice. - Set the time.. - Other Ss write down in the notebooks. - Work in pairs. - Look at the pictures and answer the questions. - Look at the board and read. - Write down in the notebooks.. - Practise in pairs. - Perform the task in front of the class. Other Ss listen and comment. - Look at the pictures and answer the questions.. - Look at the board and read. - Write down in the notebooks.. - Practise in pairs. - Perform the task in front of the class. Other Ss listen and comment. - Look at the pictures and answer the questions.. - Look at the board and read. - Write down in the notebooks.. - Practise in pairs.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(45) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Call on some pairs to perform the task in front of the class. 3. Reinforcement. - Exercises. 1. Complete the sentences. a. Where are you .........................? b. What ...................... are you? I'm Vietnamese. c. What ........... is it today? It's Monday. d. What do you do on Sundays? I .................... my grandparents. I. Vocabulary 1. Unit 4 - Show the pictures and ask the questions: - Write the words on the board. January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November, December, ordinal numbers 2. Unit 5 - Show the pictures and ask the questions: - Write the words on the board. can, ride, cook, skate, skip, sing, swim, swing, dance, play, guitar, piano, volleyball, table tennis, chess * Complete the words. 1. Jan- -ry 3. Septemb- 2. Fe- -uary 4. A- - il 5. Augu- 6. Dec- -ber - Set the time. - Call on some Ss to do on the board. - Ask Ss to change the notebooks to check . II. Sentence Patterns 1. Unit 4 - Show the pictures and answer the questions? + Asking and answering questions about dates. + Asking and answering questions about someone's birthday. - Write the sentences on the board. - What is the date today? It's .............. . - When's your birthday?. - Perform the task in front of the class. Other Ss listen and comment. - Do individually. - Some Ss do on the board, others do in your notebooks. - Work in pair to check the answers. Look at the pictures and answer the questions. - Look at the words and read. - Read individually. - Write down in the notebooks. - Look at the pictures and answer the questions. - Look at the words and read. - Read individually. - Look at the board and do the task.. - Other Ss write down in the notebooks. - Work in pairs. - Look at the pictures and answer the questions.. - Look at the board and read. - Write down in the notebooks.. - Practise in pairs.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(46) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 It's on the .............................. . * Have Ss work in pairs to practice. - Set the time. - Call on some pairs to perform the task in front of the class. 2. Unit 5 - Show the pictures and answer the questions? + Asking and answering questions about what someone can or cannot do. + Asking and answering questions about whether someone can do. - Write the sentences on the board. - What can you do? I can ..... . - Can you ........................? Yes, I can./ No, I can't. * Have Ss work in pairs to practice. - Set the time. - Call on some pairs to perform the task in front of the class. 3. Reinforcement. - Exercises. 1. Complete the sentences. a. When's your birthday? It's on the fifth of M- - - -. b. What is the date today? It's th Second of N- - - - - - -. c. What can you do? I can ........................(nhảy dây). d. Can you cook? No, I ....................... . 4. Home link: Review.. - Perform the task in front of the class. Other Ss listen and comment. - Look at the pictures and answer the questions.. - Look at the board and read. - Write down in the notebooks.. - Practise in pairs. - Perform the task in front of the class. Other Ss listen and comment.. - Do individually. - Some Ss do on the board, others do in your notebooks. - Work in pair to check the. V. Evaluation. ......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... WEEK:9 Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(47) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Date of teaching: from 31 /10 to 5/11 /2016 Perid 33 - Short. story. I. Objectives. By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: - Read, listen and understand a short story. II. Language focus. 1, Vocabulary: Review 2, Sentence patterns: Review III. Resources. - Textbook, recording, pictures, cassette, puppets… IV. Procedures. Teacher’s activities Student ‘s activities I. Warm – up. II. New lesson. SHORT STORY: CAT AND MOUSE 1 1. Read and listen to the story. - T tells Ss that they are going to read and listen to the story, and then correct - Look at the pictures and elicit. the words in red. - T asks Ss to look at the pictures and asks them some questions. - Look at the pictures and answer the + What is chit going to do for Mouse questions. sports Day? + What about his sister? + What’s his brother going to do that day? - T plays the recording for Ss to listen to the story. - Listen - T asks Ss to listen to the story and repeat. - Listen and repeat. - Ask Ss to act out the story. * Audio script: - Ss act out the story . Miu: Hello, Chit. what are you doing? Chit: We’re practicing for Mouse Sports Day. Miu: Mouse Sports Day? Where will it Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(48) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 be? Chit: On Saturday. Miu: What are you going to do? Chit: I’m going to run a hundred metres. Chit:Mimi is going to play badminton. Chit: Nini is going to play table tennis. Mui: And what are you going to do , Jack? Jack: I‘m going to watch them. 2. Answer the questions. - T tells Ss that they are going to read the passage again answer the questions. - T gives Ss a few seconds and do the task. - T calls two Ss to write their answers on the board. - T asks Ss to swap and check their answers. - T calls a few pairs to practise the conversation. Others observe and give comments. * Answer: 1. They’re practicing for Mouse Sports Day. 2. He is going to run a hundred metres. 3. She’s going to play badminton. 4. She’s going to play table tennis.5. No, he isn’t. 3. Unscramble these words from the story. - T tells Ss that they are going to put the letters in the correct order to make words, and that they can find the words in the story. - T gives Ss time to do the task. - T calls two Ss to write their answers on the board. Others give comments. - T asks Ss to swap and check their answers.. - Listen to the T. - Do the task. - Do the task.. - Some pairs practice asking and answering in front of the class. Others observe and give comments.. - Listen to the T.. - Do the task individual. - Two Ss write their answers on the board. Others give comments. - Swap and check their answers.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(49) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - T calls s few Ss to read the correct words aloud. Others listen and give comments. - T corrects the pronunciation, if necessary. * Answer: a. hundred b. Saturday c. watch d. badminton e. practising 4. Read and complete - T tells Ss that they are going to read and fill a gapped conversation. - Give them a few seconds to read conversation in silience. - Give them a time limit to do the task. - Ask Ss to practice in pairs. - T calls s few Ss to read the correct words aloud. Others listen and give comments. - T corrects the pronunciation, if necessary. * Answer 1. will 2. going 3. am 4. run 5. not 5. Work in pair. Talk about your school Sports Day. - Tell the class that they are going to have a conversation to the one in Activity 4 - Ask Ss to work in pairs. - Ask Ss to practice in pairs. 6. Read and match. - Tell the class that they are going to read. - Some Ss read the correct sentences aloud. Others listen and give comments.. - Listen to the T. - Read in silience. - Do the task individually. - A few pairs practise the conversation. Others listen and give comments.. - Listen to T. - Work in ppairs. - Practise in pairs. The others give comments.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(50) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 and match the questions with the answers. - Ask Ss to do the task in silience. - T calls two Ss to write their answers on the board. - T asks Ss to swap and check their answers. III. Home link. - T asks Ss to prepare for Test.. - Listen to the T.. - Work individual. - Write their answers on the board. - Swap and check their answers. Others give comments. - Prepare.. Period 34 TEST Full name:…………………… ........................... Class: 4…….. I. Odd one out Vietnamese Chinese America Japanese English China Australia Japan Swim April Skip Skate March May Fifth July Morning Nationality Afternoon Evening II. Choose the best answer 1. Where are you from? A. I’m from China B. I’m Chinese C. I speak Chinese 2. What do you do on Sundays? I …………… A. visits B. go swimming C. plays football 3. What ………………are you? A. nationality B. weather C. language 4. When is your………………? A. class B. birthday C. nationality 5 ……………………? It’s Monday A. What the day today? B. What day is it today? C. What the date today? III. Read and choose T or F Hello, my name is Akiko. I am from Japan. I’m Japanese. I speak Japanese and English. My school is an international school. It is Rose International School. I have got a lot of friends. There are twenty students in my class. They are from different countries. Linda is from England. She is English. Jack and Jill are from the USA. They are American. Meimei is from China. She is Chinese. Alex is from France, but her mom is from Australia. He is French. We play badminton, play hide-and-seek together. It is a lot of fun. 1. She is Akiko. T 2. She is Chinese. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(51) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 3. Her school is Rose International School. 4. Her class has got twelve students. 5. Her friends are from different countries. IV. Fill in the blank with suitable words. I go to school ........................................ Mondays to Fridays. My family often watches TV ........................................ the evening. She is ........................................ Japan. She is Japanese. My birthday is ........................................ the fifteenth of August.. V. Write about your family. My mother can…………………………….......................................... My mother can’t……………………………………………………… My father can ……………………………………………………….. My father can't…………………………………………………….... 3. My brother can……………………………………………………… My brother can’t…………………………………………………….. 4. I can………………………………………………………………… I can’t………………………………………………………… CORRECTING THE TEST. I. Odd one out. America English April Fifth Nationality II. Choose the best answer. 1. a 2. b 3. a 4. b 5. b III. Read and choose T or F. 1. F 2. T 3. F 4. T IV. Fill in the blank with suitable words. 1. from 2. in 3. from 4. on V. Write about your family. Answer vary. _________________________________________________________ Period 35. TEST. I. Objectives: By the end of the test, Ss will be able to: Use the knowledge which they have learnt to do the test. Develop their listening, speaking, reading and writing skills. II. Language focus: - Vocabulary: - Sentence patterns III. Teaching aids: Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(52) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 1. Teacher’s: papers, recordings, laptop... 2. Students’: IV. Procedure. I/ LISTENING ( 20 minutes) Question 1. Listen and number. (1 pt) B. A.. C.. D.. Question 2. Listen and colour (1pt).. 1. 2. 3. 4. Question 3. Listen and draw the lines. There is an example (1 pt). John. Joe. Trung. Linda. Question 4. Listen and tick. (1 pt) 1. John: What can you do? Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. Mai.

(53) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017. Tom:. A.. B.. C.. 2. Lilly: When’s your birthday? Jack: B. .. . A. . 3. Linda: What animal is that ?. C.. Tom:. A.. B.. C.. 4. Nga:What’s your nationality ? Tuan: A.. B. Question 5. Listen and complete. (2pt) 1. A: Where are you from? B: I’m from ________. 2. A: What’s the weather like today? B: It’s __________. 3. A: What’s the date today? B: It’s the _______of October. 4. A: What can you do? B: I can_______. PART II. READING AND WRITING Question 6. Look and read. Put a tick (. 1.. C.. ) or cross (X) in the box as examples:. 1. This is a pen.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(54) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 X 2.. 2. This is a pencil. 3. 3. There are five books.. 4. She can draw. 4. 5. This is a lion.. 5. 6. He’s from America.. 6. Question 7. Read and write the suitable words in the gaps. (1pt). 1 This is a bedroom. ………… 2. There is a bookshelf . ………... 3. There is a picture on the wall. ……….. 4. There is a television in the room. ………… Question 8. Look at the pictures and the letters. Write the words.(1 pt) Example: Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(55) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 npe. pen. 1. kteas. _____. 2. Mlisayaa. ________. 3. bscloaogh. _________. 4. mtonibdan. ________. Question 9. Fill in each gap with a suitable word from the box. tall. piano. birthday. week English. Miss Green is our (1) _________teacher. She is (2) ___________and strong. Miss Green comes from England. She’s British. She can play the (3) ________and sing very well. We have got three lessons a week with Miss Green. Her ( 4) ________is in October. It is coming soon. We are going to say Happy birthday to her! We all love Miss Green. Key: PART I: LISTENING Question 1. Listen and number. (0.25×4=1pt) 1. B 2. D 3. C 4. A Question 2. Listen and colour. (0.25×4=1pt) 1. car - blue 2. chair – brown 3. cat - balck 4.book - red Question 3. Listen and draw the lines. (0.25×4=1pt) 1. Joe - swim 2.Trung – play the piano 3. Linda – sing 4. Mai - dance Question 4. Listen and tick. (0.25×4=1pt) 1.C 2.B 3. A 4. C Question 5.Listen and complete (0.5×4=2pt) 1. Australia 2. cloudy Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(56) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 3. fifth 4. dance PART II. READING AND WRITING Question 6. Look and read. Put a tick ( (0.25×4=1pt). ) or cross (X) in the box as examples.. 3. X 4. 5. X 6. X Question 7. Read and write the suitable words in the gaps. (0.25X4=1pt) 1- No 2- Yes 3- Yes 4- No Question 8.Look at the pictures and the letters. Write the words. (0.25×4=1pt) 1- skate 2- Malaysia 3-schoolbag 4-badminton Question 9. Fill in each gap with a suitable word from the box. (0.25×4=1pt) 1. English 2. tall 3. piano 4. birthday Audio script: PART I: LISTENING Question 1. Listen and number. Question 3. Listen and draw the lines. 1/ A: Today is my birthday. (0.25×4=1pt) B: Happy birthday! 1/ This is Joe. He can swim. A: When’s your birthday, Nam? 2/ This is Trung. He can play the piano. B: It’s on the fifth of September. 3/ This is Linda. She can sing. 2/ A: Hi. My name’s Mai. 4/ And this is Mai. She can dance. B: Hello, Mai. I’m Linda. Nice to meet Question 4. Listen and tick. (0.25×4=1pt) you. 1/ A: What can you do? A: Where are you from, Linda? B: I can ride a bike. B: I’m from England. 2/ A: When’s your birthday? 3/ A: Good morning. I’m Quan. B: It’s on the twenty – third of February. B: Hello, Quan. I’m Tom. 3/ A: What animal is that? A: Where are you from, Tom? B: It’s a tiger. B: I’m from America. 4/ A: What’s your nationality? 4/ A: What day is it today, Jack? B: I’m Malaysian. B: It’s Tuesday. Question 5. Listen and complete. (2pt) A: So We have Maths today, right? 1/ A: Where are you from? B: Yes, that’s right. B: I’m from Australia. Question 2. Listen and colour. (0.25×4=1pt) 2/ A: What’s the weather like today? 1/ A: Can you paint the car blue? B: It’s cloudy. B: Blue? Ok? I’m painting now. 3/ A: What’s the date today? A: Well done. B: It’s the fifth of October. 2/ A: Good job. Can you colour the chair 4/ A: What can you do? brown? B: I can dance B: Brown? Ok. I’m colouring it. A: Good job. 3/ A: Oh! Look! Where is my cat, Mai? B: It’s over there. Is it a black cat? A: Yes, it is. It’s a black cat. 4/ A: I’m sorry, Mai. Do you look my book on this table. B: Yes. What colour is it? Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(57) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 A: It’s a red book. Which my mother gave me in my birthday. ______________________________________________________ Period 36: UNIT 6: WHERE’S YOUR SCHOOL? Lesson 1 (1-2) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will have been able to ask and answer questions about where a school is. II. Language focus: 1.Vocabulary: street, road, village, district, cousin. 2.Sentence pattern: Structures: Where’s your school? It’s in + (place) III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: audio, recordings, chalk, book , pictures….. 2. Students’: student’s book, notebook, pen, …. IV. Procedure: Teacher's activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up. - Spend a few minutes asking and answering questions - Talk about the pupil’s school. 2. Look, listen and repeat. -Tell pupils that they are going to learn to ask and answer - Listen and answer questions about where their school is. - Have them look at the four pictures to discuss the content in which the language is used. Ask them questions such as Who are the pupils? Where are they? And What are they talking about? - Play the recording a few times for pupils to listen and Listen repeat. Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the Listen and repeat characters speaking - Play the recording again for them to listen and repeat. 3. Point and say -Tell pupils that they are going to practice asking and - ask and answer answering questions about where a school is, using - Pair work Where’s your school? It’s in + (place) - Have them look at the bubbles and the pictures to understand how the language is used in different contexts. - Pair work Point to the first picture and teach the word Oxford Street. Get pupils to ask the question Where’s your school? and give the answer It’s in Oxford Street chorally and individually. Then tell them to practice asking and - Whole class answering the question in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the words under the picture. - Pair work - Repeat the same procedure with the rest of the pictures. - Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. Check as a class and correct pronunciation, if necessary. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(58) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 * Work in pairs. Ask and answer questions about your school. Ask its name and where it is. - Tell pupils that they are going to say the name and location of their own school. - First, tell pupils to work in pairs: one pupil asks What’s the name of your school? Where is it? and the other answers My school is + (school). It’s in + (place). 4. Reinforcement: - Recall the main content.. - Pair work - Whole class. V. Evaluation. ......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... WEEK:10. Date of teaching: from 7 /11 to 12 /11 /2016 Period 37: UNIT 6: WHERE’S YOUR SCHOOL? Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(59) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Lesson 1 (3-4-5) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will have been able to listen for detail information and write about where the schools are. II. Language focus: Vocabulary Sentence pattern:: Review III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: audio, recordings, chalk, book , pictures….. 2. Students’: student’s book, notebook, pen, …. IV. Procedure:. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(60) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Teacher's activities 1. Warm up. - Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson. Call a few pupils to the front of the class to talk/write about their school. 2. Listen and tick. - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to three dialogues and tick the correct pictures. - Have pupils look at the pictures to identify the similarities and differences by saying what the schools are and where they are. Have them read aloud the names of the schools and their location. Check understanding. - Play the recording a few times. Ask pupils to listen to the recording and tick the correct pictures. Tell them to focus on the names of the schools and their locations. - Get pupils to swap their answers before you check as a class. Monitor the activity and offer help, if necessary Key: 1. c 2. a 3. c 3. Look and write. - Tell pupils that they are going write where the schools are. - Give a few seconds for pupils to look at the pictures. First, focus pupils on the locations of the schools. Then have them look at the sentence under each picture and find the appropriate words to complete the sentence. If necessary, get them to work in pairs. - Get pupils time to do the task independently. Go around and offer help, if necessary. - Get pupils to swap their answers before checking as a class. If there is enough time, call a few pupils to read aloud complete sentences. Key: 1. Nguyen Trai Street 2. in Van Noi Village 3. is in South Street, London 4. Let’s sing. - Tell pupils that they are going to sing the song This is the way. Teach the song following the procedure in the Teaching the unit components in the Introduction. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. Students’ activities to talk/write about their school - listen. listen - Practise. Listen. - Pair work - Write. - Listen Read the song.

(61) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Period 38: UNIT 6: WHERE’S YOUR SCHOOL? Lesson 2 (1-2-3) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will have been able to ask and answer questions about what class someone is in. II. Language focus: - Vocabulary: class, school. - Structures: What class are you in? – I’m in Class… III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: audio, recordings, chalk, book , pictures….. 2. Students’: student’s book, notebook, pen, …. IV. Procedure:. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(62) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Teacher's Activities 1. Warm up. Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson by calling pupils to sing the song This is the way. Have the class clap hands. 2. Look, listen and repeat. -Tell pupils that they are going to learn to ask and answer questions about the class someone is in. - Have them look at the three pictures and ask some questions such as Who are they? Where are they? and What are they saying?. Check comprehension. - Play the recording a few times for pupils to listen and repeat. Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking. - Play the recording again for them to listen and repeat. 3. Point and say -Tell pupils that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about the classes the pupils are in. - Have them look at the bubbles and the pictures to understand how the language is used in different contexts. In the first two bubbles, pupils ask and answer questions about what class they are in, using What class are you in? I’m in Class… In the next two bubbles, pupils ask and answer questions about what class someone is in, using What class is she/he in? She’s/He’s in Class… Ask pupil to look at the pictures and say the classes 4A, 5B, 3C and 2D. Check comprehension. - Point to the first picture and get one pupil to ask What class are you in? and the other to answer I’m in Class 4A. Do choral and individual repetition. - Point to the second picture and get one pupil to ask What class is she in? and the other to answer She’s in Class 5B. Repeat the procedure with the rest of the pictures - Ask pupils to work in pairs, pointing to the characters speaking. Then call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. Check as a class and correct. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. Students activities - Sing. - answer. listen and repeat Do choral and individual repetition - asking and answering - Whole class. - Individual - Pair work.

(63) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Period 39: UNIT 6: WHERE’S YOUR SCHOOL? Lesson 2 (4-5-6) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will have been able to listen for detail information and write about where a school is and what class someone is in. II. Language focus: - Vocabulary and structures: Review III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: audio, recordings, chalk, book , pictures….. 2. Students’: student’s book, notebook, pen, …. IV. Procedure: Teacher's Activities Students activities 1. Warm up. Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson by asking - Whole class some pupils to talk about their school and class. 2. Listen and number -Tell pupils that they are going to listen to four dialogues - Whole class and number the pictures. - Give them a few seconds to look at the pictures. Ask them to focus on the names and locations of the schools (Pictures a and b) and the names of the classes (Pictures c and d). - Play the recording more than once, if necessary, for - Individual pupils to listen and number the pictures. - Get pupils to swap their answers before you check as a - Pair work class. Key: a3 b1 c4 d2 3. Look and write -Tell pupils that they are going to read the dialogues and - Whole class fill the gaps, using the picture cues. - Have them look at Dialogues 1 and 2. Explain that they need to complete the answers with the streets where the schools are in. Then ask them to look at the pictures to identify the answers. Then have pupils look at Dialogues 3 and 4. Explain that they need to complete the answers with the classes the pupils are in. Then ask them to look at the pictures to identify the answers. - Individual, - Set a time limit for pupils to do the task independently. Go around offering help, if necessary. - Pair work - Get pupils to swap their answers before checking as a class. Key: 1. Chu Van An Street 2. in South Street, London 3. Class 4B 4. in Class 4C - Whole class 4. Let’s play. - Tell pupils that they are going to play the game Pass the - Group work secret! Follow the procedure in Games in Introduction. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(64) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Divide them into groups of six. Ask them to line up in rows. Then whisper the first pupil in each row a sentence. The first pupil then whispers the sentence to the second one. The last pupil in the row says aloud the sentence she/he heard. The group that says the teacher’s sentence - Whole class correctly in the shortest time will win the game. 5. Reinforcement: - Whole class - Recall the main content. 6. Homelink: - Prepare the next period. Period 40: UNIT 6: WHERE’S YOUR SCHOOL? Lesson 3 (1-2-3) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will have been able to pronounce the sounds of the letters sch, sk and str in the words school, skipping and street respectively. II. Language focus: - Vocabulary and structures: Review - Phonics: school, skipping and street III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: audio, recordings, chalk, book , pictures….. 2. Students’: student’s book, notebook, pen, …. IV. Procedure:. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(65) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Activities 1. Warm up. Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson by getting pupils to do a dictation. 2. Listen and repeat. -Tell pupils that they are going to practise saying the sounds of the letters sch, sk and str in the words school, skipping and street respectively. - Put the letters sch, sk and str on the board. Play the recording and ask pupils to repeat a few times. Then put the words school, skipping and street, the three sentences on the board. Play the recording more than once, if necessary, and let pupils say the words and the sentences, paying attention to the target sounds. - Do choral and individual repetition of the sounds, words and sentences until pupils feel confident. - Get some pupils to say the sentences in front of the class. Correct the pronunciation, if necessary. 3. Listen and circle. Then write and say aloud. - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording, circle the correct answers and write the words in the blanks. - Give pupils a few seconds to read the sentences in silence and guess the words to fill the gaps. - Have pupils listen to the recording and circle the appropriate options. Allow them time to do the task independently. - Give them time to write the words in the gaps. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. Interactions - Whole class - Whole class. - Whole class - Individual. - Whole class. - Individual - Pair work.

(66) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017. V. Evaluation. ......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... WEEK:11. Date of teaching: from 14 /11 to 19 /11 /2016 Period 41: UNIT 6: WHERE’S YOUR SCHOOL? Lesson 3: 4-5- 6. I. OBJECTIVES:. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - Read and complete the pictures. - Write about yourself II. LANGUAGE FOCUS. 1. Vocabulary: Review 2. Sentence Patterns: Review III.RESOURCES: Audio and visual aids: Recordings, Students’ book, workbook… IV. PROCEDURES : Teacher’s activities Student’s activities 1. Warm up. - Ask the class sing the chant: Can you swim? - Read the chant. 2. Read and complete. - Tell Ss that they are going to read the text about - Open the book and pay attention Mai and her friends Nam and Phong and write their to the title and the picture. names under the pictures. Explain the meaning of “ -Read the text in silent. v” “x” in the pictures. - Do the task. - Check understanding. Have them read the first - Listen to the teacher. three lines of the passage and explain why we put -Swap and check their answers Mai under the third pair of pictures. before checking as a class. - Get them to read the text and focus on the -Read the dialogues. information to complete the blanks. If necessary, Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(67) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 get sts to work in pairs or small groups. - Give sts time to do the task independently. Go around offering help, if necessary. 3. Write about yourself. - Asks S to open their S’s book on page 35. Tells them that they are going to write a short blog. - Ask sts if they or their family members have written a blog. Explain how and why people write a blog. - Tell sts that the given text is an article from a blog. Ask sts to read the blog to understand what Linda writes about herself. - Have sts work in pairs or groups to discuss what they are going to write. Then give them time to do the task independently. - Get sts to swap their answers before checking as a class. If there is time, ask one st to write the answer on the board. 4. Project. -Tell Ss that they are going to interview three classmates to get information about their abilities and complete the chart. - Ask sts to pay attention to the sample sentences in the bubbles. Check their understanding of the symbols in the chart. - Get a pair to do a demonstration in front of the class as an example before starting the activity. - Give sts time to do the interview in class - Call some sts to the front of the class to report on their work. - If time allows, you may make a chart to show the number of sts who can do each of the four activities and put it on the wall for display. 5. Consolidation - T repeats the sentence patterns. - T makes a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the language.. - Answer - Look at the picture and do the task individually. - Exchange their answers with other pairs to find out possible answers. - Some Ss to report their answers to the class. - Write down the answers.. - Listen to the T. - Work in groups. - Report their work. - Perform - Listen and take notes Remember. PERIOD 42: UNIT 7: WHAT DO YOU LIKE DOING? Lesson 1: Parts ( 1, 2 ) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: -Use the words phrases related to the topic My hobby. -Ask and answer questions about what someone likes doing, using What do you like doing? I like + V-ing+ ( noun). Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(68) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 II Language focus: 1.Vocabulary : listen to music, watching TV, swimming, cooking, collecting stamps, playing chess. 2. Sentence Partners: What do you like doing? I like reading. III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Teaching processes: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up: Sing the chant: school, school, school. - Sing the chant 2. New lesson: 2.1. Look, listen and repeat. - Asks Ss to identify the characters in the picture on -Look at the pictures in the page 46 and what they are saying. book Set the sentences “you are going to listen to Linda, Nam, Tony and Phong talk about their hobby. - Plays the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. -Listen. - Plays the recording again and asks Ss to listen and repeat. -Repeat after the tape. - T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue. Have whole - Listen and repeat. class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. - Ask Ss questions: Who are they? Where are they? What are they talking about? -Give the structure: What do you like doing? I like reading, I like listening to music, I like -Read and write down. watching. 2.2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 46. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: -listening to music -collecting stamps -Read and write new words. -watching TV - playing chess -swimming - cooking - Check vocab: slap the board Model sentence: What do you like doing? - Look and find out the model I like........................ sentences. - Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call some Ss to talk about school facilities. Ask them to point the pictures and make sentences. - Point the pictures and Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(69) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity practice. and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Asks Ss to practice in pair. - Call on some Ss to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give - Practice in pairs. comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3. Reinforcement - Summary the lesson. 4. Home link - Learn by heart the new words and new structures -Listen and remember. Period 43. UNIT 7: WHAT DO YOU LIKE DOING? Lesson 1: Parts (3, 4, 5). I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to : + Talk about their hobbies. + Develop Ss writing and listening skills. II. Language focus: 1.Vocabulary : listen to music, watching TV, swimming, cooking, collecting stamps, playing chess. 2. Sentence Partners: What do you like doing? I like reading. III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Procedure Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Warm up: Jumped words - Do exercises 2. New lesson: 2.1. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page - Indentify the characters in each 47 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of picture. the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and - Listen and tick. tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their -Listen and check. answers. T give the answer: Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(70) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Answer: 1b, 2c, 3a - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 2.2. Look and write. - Have pupils open their books to Page 47. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are doing. - Tell Ss that they are going to look at the picture and get information to write the missing words in 4 sentences. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers with in pairs or groups for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1.playing football 2. Playing chess 3. Reading (book) 4. Collecting stamps - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 2.3. Let’s sing - Introduce the song : I like doing things Page 47. - Play the recording and listen to The song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practice singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 3. Reinforcement Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. * Exercises: - Ask Ss to do Ex in Part B. 4. Home link - Learn by heart the song.. -Answer T’s questions. - Indentify the characters in each picture.. - Work individually - Pair work. -Check their answers.. -Listen. - Listen and sing -Sing in group. -Sing and do the actions.. -Listen and remember. - Do exercises in the book,. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(71) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Period 44 UNIT 7: WHAT DO YOU LIKE DOING? Lesson 2: Parts (1, 2,3) I. Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to: + Ask and answer questions about someone’s hobbies. + Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: riding a bike,flying kite, taking photos, playing badminton 2. Sentence Partners: What is your hobby? I like playing the piano. III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Procedures. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Warm up: Sing “I like doing things” song. - Sing the song 2. New lesson: 2.1. Look, listen and repeat. - Have Ss to look at the book at page 48. Elicit - Look at the pictures in the book the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the sentences: we are going to learn new phrases. - Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the -Listen. lines in the speech bubbles. - Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the - Listen and repeat. lines in the speech bubbles two times. - Divide the class into two groups. One repeat -Repeat in group. Mai’s part and the other repeat Hoa’s part. - Asks Ss read in pair to reinforce their - Read in pairs. pronunciation. * Teach vocabulary: -Read and write new words. riding a bike, flying kite, taking photos, playing badminton Check vocab: what and where -Elicits the structures: What’s your hobby? I like ..................... 2.2. Point and say - Look at 4 pictures. -Have Ss look at the pictures on page 48. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(72) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Tony, Linda, Mai to Ss -Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures. - Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures and the structure: What’s your hobby? I like........ Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. -Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. I like riding a bike I like playing badminton I like flying kite I like taking photos I like watching TV - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 2.3. Let’s talk: -Show pictures and give task. Have Ps work in pair ask and answer the questions: What do you like doing? What’s your hobby? -Work in pairs - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practice. The rest listen and give the remark. Correct Ss’ pronunciation 3. Reinforcement Summary the lesson - Ask Ss to do Ex in Part C. 4. Home link - Learn by heart the new words and structures.. - Point to the pictures and practice.. - Play role and speak out.. - Work in pair practice talking:. -Work in pair ask and answer the questions:. - Listen and correct. - Listen and give the remark.. - Do exercises in the workbook.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(73) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017. : V. Remark ......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... WEEK:12 Date of teaching: from 21 /11 to 26 /11 /2016 Period 45 UNIT 7: WHAT DO YOU LIKE DOING? Lesson 2: Parts (4,5,6) I. Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to: + Listen and number the picture you hear. + Write about their hobbies. - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills II. Language focus: - Vocabulary: review - Sentence Partners: review III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Procedure. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to make question and answer about -Practice in pairs. school facilities. 2. New lesson: 2. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on - Look at the pictures in the book page 49 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are - Listen and number going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(74) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 number the boxes. -Listen and check. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare - Ps answer. the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ - Look at 4 pictures. comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1c, 2a, 3d, 4b 2.2. Look and write Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 49. Set the sentence: “you are going to look at the -Work individually. pictures to get the information in order to write the best answer.” Have a revision of the language: - Read the sentences. -Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match the sentence with an appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary -Practice in pairs. Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in - Talk about their hobbies chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. riding a bike 2.flying kite 3. taking photograph 4. playing badminton 2.3. Let’s play. - Have pupils open their books to Page 49. Get Ss to read the sticker. Tell pupils that they are going to talk about their hobbies, using the sticker and the questions What is your hobby? - Pupils practice in pairs. -Work in pair. - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Summary the lesson. 3. Reinforcement - Summary the lesson. - Prepare next lesson. 4. Home link - Prepare next lesson. Period 46: UNIT 7: WHAT DO YOU LIKE DOING? Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(75) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Lesson 3: Part (1-2-3) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: talk, ask and answer question about their hobbies. -Pronounce the sounds in the letters /fl/, /pl/ correctly. - Develop Ss writing and listening skills II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: - Phonics: fl flying I like flying a kite. pl playing He likes playing the piano. 2. Sentence patterns: I like flying a kite. He likes playing the piano. III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Procedure. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up: Chatting Ask Ss to practice in pairs. - T asks Ss to make questions and answer about their hobbies. 2. New lesson: 2.1. Listen and repeat -Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the -Look at the pictures in the book. chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words flying and playing -Introduce the sounds /fl/ and /pl/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Listen and repeat. -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you. - Call on some Ss to read in front of the class. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2.2. Listen and circle. Then say aloud. - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the -Look at 4 sentences . suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and -Listen and fill in the blank. fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their -Listen and check. answers. T give the answer: Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(76) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1b, 2a, 3b, 4a 2.3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant: Flying a little kite. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. -Ps listen to the tape and chant - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 3. Reinforcement Summary the lesson. - Ask Ss to do Ex in Part A. 4. Home link Do exercises in the workbook. - Learn by heart the chant. Period 47 UNIT 7: WHAT DO YOU LIKE DOING? Lesson 3: Part (4-5-6) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: talk, ask and answer question about their hobbies. - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: review 2. Sentence Partners: review III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Procedure. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up: - Ask Ss to read the chant. -Ss read the chant. 2. New lesson: 2.1. Read and complete. T introduces the topic “you are going to -Look at the sentences in the book. read the letter to get the information in -Read and work individually order to complete the sentence to the text”. Work in pairs. Ss read the letter individually and Ss do -Fill the suitable words in the blanks the task -Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction. Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ -Work individually. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(77) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Answers: 1 nine. -Do the task. 2. collecting stamps, taking photos 3. playing chess 4. penfriend 2.2. Add your photo and write a reply email to Mai -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise. Do exercises in the workbook. -Ask students to read the paragraph in the book and write a reply email to Mai, using the information from activitiy 4. - Give Ss time to do the task. - Ask Ss to read their email and the other comment. 2.3. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: talk about their hobbies. Ex: I like collecting stamps I have..... They are....... -Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 3. Reinforcement Summary the lesson. - Ask Ss to do Ex in Part F. 4. Homework - Prepare next lesson. Period 48 Unit 8. What subjects do you have today? Lesson 1(1,2) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - introduce the school facilities, using That's+ ( school facility). - Improve listening, speaking, reading, writing skills. II. Language focus * Vocabulary : words related to the topic school subjects * Structures : What subjects do you have today ? III. Teaching aids - A tape, handmade puppets, flashcards of the photographs of people. IV. Procedure Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(78) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up - ask some S to show the things they’ve collected and talk about their hobbies 2. New lesson 2. 1. Look, listen and repeat - tell S that they are going to read a story about in which S ask and answer about school subjects - have them look at the pictures and discuss the context - play the recording for S to listen and repeat for a few times - ask S to role play - call some pairs of S to role play in front of the class 2. 2. Point and say - tell S that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about school subjects - teach them sentence pattern: What subjects do you have today? – I have... - ask them to look at pictures and repeat the names of the subjects under the pictures - get them to practice asking and answering with the words given - call on some pairs to act out the dialogues in front of the class * Work in pairs: - ask S to work in pairs 3. Consolidation In this lesson, S have learnt about subjects and asking- answering What bujects do you have today? 4. Homelink - practice singing the song at home. Students’ activities E.x: I like collecting stamps. I have twenty stamps. They are very nice... 2. 1. Look, listen and repeat. 2. 2. Point and say - write new sentence pattern in the notebooks - read the words under the pictures - practise. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(79) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 V. Evaluation. ......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... WEEK:13 Date of teaching: from 28 /11 to 3 /12 /2016 Period 49 Unit 8. What subjects do you have today? Lesson 1-P2 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - introduce the school facilities, using That's+ ( school facility). - Improve listening, speaking, reading, writing skills. II. Language focus * Vocabulary : words related to the topic school subjects * Structures : What subjects do you have today ? III. Teaching aids - A tape, handmade puppets, flashcards of the photographs of people. IV. Procedure Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up - ask some S to show the things they’ve collected and talk about their hobbies 2. 3. Listen and tick 2. New lesson 2. 3. Listen and tick - tell S that they are going to listen to three dialogues about school subjects and tick the - listen and tick the correct answers correct pictures - have them look at the pictures, say names of the subjects in English Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(80) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - play the recording for S to listen and do the task - get them to swap the answers 2. 4. Look and write - tell S that they are going to fill the gaps with different days of the week - have them look at the pictures to identify the days of the week and subject they have each day - give them time to do the task - get S to swap the answers 2. 5. Let’s sing - tell S that they are going to sing the song What day is it today? - have them read each line of the lyric - play the recording for S to listen and sing along - ask S to sing in groups - call on some groups to sing - all the class sing and clap hands 3. Consolidation In this lesson, S have learnt about subjects and asking- answering What bujects do you have today? 4. Homelink - practice singing the song at home Period 50. 2. 4. Look and write. 2. 5. Let’s sing - read the lyric - practice singing. Unit 8: What subjects do you have today? Lesson 2( 1- 2- 3 ). I. Objectives. By the end of the lesson, pupils are able to ask and answer about their timetables, using: When do you have…? And “I have it on…”. II. Language focus. 1. Vocabulary: 2. Sentence patterns: - When do you have Science? - I have it on Monday III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Procedures. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Warm up: - Spend a few minutes revising the previous - Sing the song. lesson by having the class sing the song What day is this today? - Listen to the instruction. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(81) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 2. Look, listen and repeat. - Tell Ps that they are going to read a story in which ps ask and answer questions about their timetables. - Give them a few seconds to look at the pictures and read the text. Get them to identify the characters and the setting of the conversation by asking Who’s this? What are they doing? What are they talking about? Check comprehension. - Play the recording more than once, if necessary, for Ps listen and repeat. Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking. - Pay the recording again for Ps to listen and repeat. If time allows, ask a few pairs to role play the conversation. 3. Point and say. - Tell Ps that they are going to practise the question and answer When do you have Science? And I have it on… - Let them look at the timetable. Ask them to identify the names of the four Ps in the first column and the days when these Ps have Science. Check comprehension. - Point to the first row of the table and get one pupil to ask When do you have Science, Sam? And another to answer I have it on Mondays and Thursdays. Repeat the procedure with the other rows in the table. - Ask them to work in pairs, ask and answer the question, using the given text in the bubbles and the information in the timetable. - Call a few pairs to act out the exchanges. 4. Let’s talk. -Tell Ps that they are going to revise what they have learnt in lesson 1, 2. - Get them to work in pairs, ask and answer three questions. Remind them to answer with facts about themselves. - Call a few pairs to act out their conversation. - Encourage Ps to observe and give. - Look at the picture and read the text. - In picture a, a friend asks Nam what is he doing. In picture b, he continues to asks When do you have English? And Nam answers I have it on Mondays, Tuesdays, Thursdays and Fridays. In picture c, Nam asks his friend What about you? And the friend says he has English on Mondays, Tuesdays, Wednesdays and Fridays. In picture d, Nam tells that his teacher is Miss Hien. -Listen and repeat. - Listen and repeat then role play. - Listen and repeat. - Look at the timetable and identify the name of four ps. - Answer.. - Work in pairs. - Act out the exchanges. - Listen to the T. - Work in pairs. - Act out their conversation. - Ask and answer about the timetables. - Listen and remember.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(82) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 comments in English. 5. Reinforcement. - Have the whole class ask and answer about the timetables they have today. Period 51 Unit 8: What subjects do you have today? Lesson 2( 4 -5 -6 ) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to write correctly the sentences about when someone has a subject. II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: (Review) 2. Sentence patterns: (Review) III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Warm up: - Spend a few minutes revising the previous - Play the Slap the board game. lesson by getting the class to play Slap the board, using the days of the week and the word English. Then ask pupils When do you have English? - Listen to the teacher. Remind pupils to answer with information from actual English timetable. 2. Listen and number - Identify the days in each picture. - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to four dialogues about different PE timetables and number them in the order they hear. - Ask them to look at the pictures and identify the days where there is a PE lesson. - Read aloud the days. ( a. Tuesdays and Thursdays. b. Tuesdays and Fridays. c. Mondays and Wednesdays. d. - Listen and number. Wednesdays and Thursdays.) - Have pupils read aloud the days before playing the recording. - Play the recording more than once, if necessary. - Work in pairs. Ask pupils to listen and number the pictures. Tell them that they should focus on the days of the week. - Get pupils to swap their answers before you check as a class. Monitor the activity and often - Listen to the teacher. help, if necessary. Key: a. 3 b. 4 c. 1 d. 2 - Read the text. 3. Look and write. - Tell pupils that they are going to complete the Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(83) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 sentences, using the given timetable. - Give them a few seconds to look at the - Do the task. timetable and read the text. Then check comprehension by asking When does pupils have - Some Ps reports the answer. English? - Set a time limit for the task and offer help, if necessary. - Check the answers as a class and call one or - Listen to the teacher. two pupils to read aloud the complete text. Key: English, Wednesday, Wednesday(s) 4. Let’s play. - Guess the words. - Tell pupils that they are going to play the puzzle by writing the names of the school subjects. - Ask them to look at the word SUBJECTS and the rows of boxes 1 to 5. Have pupils think about the name of the subject bearing one letter of the - Work in pairs. word SUBJECTS and complete the puzzle, using one letter per box. Do number 1 as an example: SCIENCE. - Read aloud the answers. - Ask pupils to work in pairs to discuss the possible answer. Go around offering help, if necessary. - Call on some of them to say the answers. - Work in groups. Key: 1.Science 2.Music 3.English 4.Vietnamese 5.Maths 5. Reinforcement. - Listen and remember. - Have Ps to work in groups of four to talk about their timetable. 5. Home link. - Ask Ps to write about their timetable at home. Period 52 Unit 8: What subjects do you have today? Lesson 3 ( 1 - 2 -3 ) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Pupils will be able to: - pronounce the sounds of the letters ct and cts in the words subject and subjects, - listen and circle the correct answers, and II. Language focus. 1. Phonics: ct - subject , cts - subjects 2. Vocabul III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(84) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 1.Warm up. - Get Ps to play the “ Subjects maze” game about some subjects they learned. 2. Listen and repeat. - Tell Ss that they are going to practise saying the letters, words and sentences in the book. - Put the phonics letters ct and cts in the words subject and subjects on the board and say them a few times. - Pronounce the sound of the letters “ct” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times.( the whole class, in groups, individuals). - Pronounce the sound of the word “subject” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times. ( the whole class, in groups, individuals). - Do similarly with “ cts- subjects”. Do choral repetition of the words and sentences until Ss feel confident. 3. Listen and tick. Then write and say aloud. - Ask Ss to open their book and read the instruction and make sure they understand it. Ask them to guess all the complete words and do the first example with Ss. - Set the time and get Ss to work independently. - Play the recording all the way through for Ss to listen and tick. - Play the second time and ask Ss to do the task. - Have Ss check their answers in pairs, then ask some Ss to report their answer to the class. - Gives the best answers. subject subjects 1 V 2 V 3 V 4 V 4. Let’s chant. - Tell Ss that they are going to sing the chant What subjects do you have today? - Teach the chant following the procedure in Teaching the unit components in the Introduction. - Give a few seconds for Ss to sing the chant.. - Play the game. - Open the book and pay attention to the title and the picture. - Look at the board. - Observe. - Listen and repeat. - Observe. - Listen and repeat. - Observe. - Listen and repeat.. - Open their book. - Read the instruction. - Guess all the complete words. - Work independently. - Listen the recording and do the task. - Check their answers in pairs - Some Ps report their answer to the class.. - Listen to the T. - Look at the chant and listen to the teacher. - Sing the chant.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(85) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Check comprehension. - Say each line of the chant, then have Ss repeat it a few ties. Give a demonstration of chanting and clapping the rhythm. - Divide class into two groups: one group chants the questions and the other chants the answers. - Get groups of Ss to sit face to face and practise chanting and doing the actions. Go around to offer help, if necessary. - Call two groups to the front of the class to chant and do the actions. The rest of the class claps along to the rhythm. 5. Reinforcement. - Get Ps to work in pairs to sing the new chant by replacing some subjects: English, Music, Art and Maths into Vietnamese, IT, Science and PE. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the language.. - Repeat each line of the chant. - Work in 2 groups. - Role play - Sit face to face and practise chanting and doing the actions - Present their talk in front of the class. - Sing the chant. - Listen and take notes. - Listen and remember.. V. Evaluation. ......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(86) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017. WEEK:14 Date of teaching: from 5 /12 to 10 /12 /2016 Period 53 - Unit 8: What subjects do you have today? Lesson 3: 4, 5, 6 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, sts will be able to read and write about you and your school subjects. II. Language focus Vocabulary What subjectsdo you have today? II.Resources: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Procedures: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Warm up - Sing the chant. - Get sts to sing the chant What subjectsdo you have today? on page56. 2. Read and complete. - Show and introduce the text about Nga and - Look at the text completethe timtable. - Give them to look at the timtable and - Read the questions guees the subjects they can use to fill the gap - Have them read the text to find - Look at the task and discuss how to information they need to complete the task do this one. - Get ss towork in pairs. - Pairs work. - Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Trade their answers in pairs for the - Let Pupils trade their answers in pairs for correction. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(87) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 the correction. - Call on some pupils to report their answers. - Comment and provide key: Answers: 1. Vietnamese 2. Maths. 3. Science. 4. Art . 3.Write about you and your school subjects - Tell them that they are going to complete some sentences about their school subjects. -Have them work in pairs to discuss what words they are going to fill the gaps with -Give ss time to do the task independently - Go through the task with the whole class and let them do this individually. - Monitor – help. - Let sts trade their answers in pairs for the correction. - Ask two sts to write down their answers on the board and check - Call on some Sts to read aloud their sentences. - Check and correct mistakes 4. Project. - Tell ss that they are going to interview a friend in another school about his/her timetatble and tell the class about it. -Give each of them a small piece of paper and ask them to copy the table on the page 57 in the ss’ book -Tell ss to ask a friend in another school about his/her timetable during breaktime and tick the table -Have them tell the class about their friends’timetables. Vietnamese Mon Tue Wed Thur Fri Maths English Science IT Music Art PE. -Listen -Pair work to discuss - Listen to the T. - Go through the task with the T. -One pupil go to the board and write - Trade their answers in pairs for the correction. - Check and correct mistakes - Interview - Listen - Do the task individually - Report - Comment and correct mistakes - Read aloud. write about their activities at the weekend in the notebook. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(88) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 5. Reinforcement- List all the activities that Saturdays Sundays sts do at the weekend on the board and ask Morning them to read aloud. Afternoon 6. Homelink.Ask sts to write about their Evening activities at the weekend in the notebook Period 54 Unit 9 WHAT ARE THEY DOING? Lesson 1 (Parts:1, 2). I. Objectives:- By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to use the words and phrases to the topic Classroom activities and ask and answer questions about what someone is doing, using What’s he/she doing? He’s/She’s…. II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: dictation, writing a dictatation 2. Sentence patterns:- What’s he/she doing? He’s/She’s reading a book III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up. -. play Bingo -Ask ss to play Bingo to revise verbs for learning activities in the classroom(read, listen,talk, play..). -Follow the procedure in Game in introduction. 2. Look, listen and repeat. - Tell Ps that they are going to read a - Look, listen and answer the questions. story in which pupils ask and answer questions about what someone is doing in - Read sliently the classroom. -Ask them to look at the 4 pictures to -Look at pictures identify the characters( Mai, nam Tom and peter) - Ask them some questions: - Answer + Who are they in the picture? + Where are they? + What are they doing? - Listen to the recording. - T plays the recording through for Ps to listen to the dialogues. - Listen and repeat. - T plays the recording again, pausing after each line for Ps to repeat. - Work in groups. - T divides the class into two groups: one group to repeat Mai’s and the Nam’s part. - Practice in front of class. - Work in pairs - Call on Ps to practise in front of the class. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(89) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Correct, remark. - Listen and read a few times 3. Point and say. -Teach the new word: dictation, Writing a - Listen dictation. (TPR) -Tell ss that they are going to practise asking and answering questions about -Listen and look at the bubbles on their someone is doing. books -Have them look at the bubbles to understand how to use the language -Ask ss to look at the 4 pictures to - Obsever and copy down identify what the girl/boy is doing in each picture - Point to the picture a and model the task with a pupil: - Listen and repeat a few times. T: Wha’s she doing ? - Work in pairs. P: She’s watching avideo - Ask them to say the sentences chorally - Some pairs practice in front of the class. and individually. Other listen and check. - Ask Ps to work in pairs. - Call some pairs practice in front of the class. - Check Ps’ mistakes when necessary. - play game. 4. Reinforcement . -Play game : missing words a. What are you doing? - Retell the content of the lesson -I am listening to music 5. Homelink. b. What is she doing ? - Learn by heart new words and structure. -She is writing a dictation What is he/she doing ? He’s/She’s…. -Remember -Prepare new lesson (3,4,5 on page59). Period 55 Unit 9 WHAT ARE THEY DOING? Lesson 1 (Parts:4, 5, 6) I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to asking and answering questions about what someone is doing, using What’s he/she doing? He’s/She’s…. And listen and tick. - Develop Ps listening and writing skills. II. Language focus: 1.Vocabulary: 2. Sentence patterns: (review ) What’s he/she doing? He’s/She’s…. III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Procedures: Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(90) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up - Give some phrases/words . Ask ss to act out the questions and the answers in front of the class. a.Lan /reading a book b.Mary/ listening to the radio c.Tom /doing homework 2. Listen and tick. -Tell ss that they are going to listen to three dialogues about what someone is doing and tick the correct pictures. - Have pupils look at pictures on page 73 of the Student Book to the similarrities and differences among them. -Check understanding - Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the correct pictures. - Ask Ps to compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. - Give the answer.1-b;2-c;3-a - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 3. Look and write -Ask them to look at 4 pictures to identify what the character in each picture is doing. -Ask ss to read the questions and write the answers -Get them to work in pairs. -Give 5 minutes to do the task indepently - Go around offering help, if necessary. - Call on some Ps to report the answers . - Have Ps read aloud the sentences they have written. - Ask some Ps to read aloud. The rest of the class listens and gives comments. - Check and correct. 1. He’s reading a book 2. She’s writng a dictation 3. He’s listening to music 4. She’s watching TV/ a video. Students’ activities -Pair work. - Look at the pictures - Listen. - 1a.Linda is writing 1b. reading. 1c listening 2a.Nam/ listening, b.reading, c.writing 3a. Peter/ a.reading,c.watching a game - Guess the answer - Listen and do the task. - Exchange. - Check the correct the answer. - Look at 4 pictures to identify what the character in each picture is doing. - work in pairs - report the answers - Some Ps to read aloud. The rest of the class listens and gives comments.. - Open their Students’ book. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(91) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 4.Let’s play. -Tell pupils that they are going to play - Listen and play game Charades. - Fllow the procedure in Games in Introduction -.Divide them into groups of three. Pupil 1 mimes a classroom activity (e. g. readinga book,listening to music) without making any sounds or lip movements. Pipil 2 points to Pupil 1 and asks What’s he/ she doing?Pupil 3 answers (e.g.He’s/She’s reading a book.) - The pupils in groups take turns asking and answering the questions. Monitor the activity and offerhelp , if necessary - Listen and remember 5. Reinforcement - T repeats the sentence patterns Period: 56 Unit 9 WHAT ARE THEY DOING? Lesson 2 (Parts:1, 2 ,3 ). I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to use the words and phrases to the topic Classroom activities and ask and answer questions about what pupils are doing, using What’re they doing? They’re + v + ing ? II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: mask , painting , plane 2. Sentence patterns: - What’re they doing? They ‘re reading a book III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up. -. Play game -Ask ss to play slap the board by using vocabulary learnt to revise verbs for learning activities in the classroom(read, listen,talk, play..). -Follow the procedure in Game in introduction. 2. Look, listen and repeat. - Look, listen and answer the questions. - Tell Ps that they are going to read a story in which pupils ask and answer - Read sliently questions about what pupils are doing in the classroom. -Look at pictures Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(92) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 -Ask them to look at the 4 pictures to identify the context in which the language is used - Ask them some questions: + Who is girl/ boy ? + Who are they in the picture? + Where are they? + What are they doing? - In picture a Tom and Linda are standing near the door of the classrom and are talking. - In piture b and c Linda talk about what pupil at the red , blue and yellow tables are doing and Tom ask if they are having an art lesson - Checking comprehension - T plays the recording through for Ps to listen to the dialogues. - T plays the recording again, pausing after each line for Ps to repeat. - Work in pairs - Call on Ps to practise in front of the class. - Correct, remark. 3. Point and say. -Teach the new word: mask , plane , puppet -Tell ss that they are going to practise asking and answering questions about people are doing. -Have them look at the bubbles to understand how to ask and answer questions about what people are doing using what people are doing in each picture -Ask ss to look at the 4 pictures to identify what the girl/boy is doing in each picture - Point to the picture a and model the task with a pupil: T: What’re they doing ? P: They’re paiting mask - Ask them to say the sentences chorally and individually. - Ask Ps to work in pairs.. - Answer -Listen and answer. - Listen -Listen and look at the bubbles on their books Repeat in choral and individual repetition - point to the picture and speaking - Obsever and copy down. - Listen and repeat a few times. - Work in pairs. - Some pairs practice in front of the class. Other listen and check.. - repeat in choral then individual - pair work. -Listen and take note. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(93) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Call some pairs practice in front of the class. - Check Ps’ mistakes when necessary... .. V. Evaluation. ......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... WEEK:15. Date of teaching: from 12 /12 to 17 /12 /2016 PERIOD: 57 UNIT 9 WHAT ARE THEY DOING ? Lesson 2 (4,5,6 ) I :Objectives:- Listen for specific information and number each piture correctly - Look at the pictures and write answers - Learn how to sing “ What are they doing “ II : Language focus: What are they doing ? III : Resources: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV: Procedure:. Teacher’s activities 1: Warm up :Revising the previous lesson by asking some pairs to ask and answer about what people are doing , using what are they doing ?They are……… 2. Listen and number: - Tell ps that they’re going to listen to a text about what some pupils are doing at breaktime and number the piture. - Ask them to look at the pictures and identifiy what the characters in each picture are doing a: They are playing badminton b : They are making paper plane c : They are making a kite - Play the recording. Students’ activities Look at the pictures and answer the questions. - Listen to the teacher and look at the pictures in the book Who are they ? What are they doing ?. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(94) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Play it again - Monitor the activities and offer help if necessary * Key : A2 B4 C3 D1 3.Look and write: - Tell pupils that they are going to answer the questions about the what children are doing , using the picture cues - Ask them to look at four pitures to identify what the characters in each picture are doing. - Ask them to read the questions and write the answers, using picture cues - Get pupils to work in pairs, if necessary - Control the class and offer help if necessary. - Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class - Invite some pairs to act out the dialogues ( if there is enough time ) 4. Let’s sing : What are they doing ? - Tell pupils that they are going to sing the song what are they doing ? , teach the song follow the procedure in teaching the unit components in inproduction - Have them read each line of the lyrics aloud. Check comprehention - Play the recording all the way through. Ask pupils to do choral and individual repetition of the song line by line un til they get familiarized with the pronunciation, the stress, the rhythm and the tune of the song - Play the recording again and get pupils to sing along with the recording - Divide class in to two groups : One sing the questions and the other sing the answers. The rest of the class sings the song together, clapping hands 5. Reinforcement : - Show all the picture in part 3 & 4 pupils look at these and make question and answers. listen and number Checking answers Swap and check each other. - Listen to the teacher. - Look at the pictures and identify who and what are they doing ? - Find out the answers for each picture - Pair work - Swap and check each other - Correct if necessary - Listen to the T’s instruction. - Read the song - Look at the book and listen to the recording then repeat in choral and individual. - sing along - Sing in the groups. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(95) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Find out questions and answers, copy the sentence pattern in the note book. Period : 58- UNIT 9 WHAT ARE THEY DOING ? Lesson 3 ( 1, 2 ,3 ) I. Objectives : At the end of the lesson pupils will be able to pronounce the sounds of the letters sk and xt in the word mask and text respectively. II. Language focus : 1.Phonics: Sk mask xt text 2.Vocabulary: mask,text 3. Sentence pattern: He’s making a mask. III. Resources : 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Procedures : Teacher’s activities Studentss’activities 1. Warm up : Revising the previous lesson by calling some pupils to the front of the class to sing Listen to the teacher’s instruction the song What are they doing ?Have class listen and clap their hands. 2. Listen and repeat: -Tell pupils that they are going to practise saying - Copy and pay the attention on the soud of the letters sk and xt in the word mask the sounds of the words. and text respectively. - Repeat - Fisrt, put the letters sk and xt on the board. Play the recording and ask pupils to repeat afew times. Then put the words mask and text on the board, play the recording and ask pupils to repeat a few times. After that write the sentence He’s making a mask and she is making a text on the board. - play the recording afew times and let pupils say - Listen and repeat in chorus then the sentences,paying attention to the target sounds individual - Do choral and individual repetition of the sounds words and sentences until pupils feel confident - Get some ps to say the sentences in front of the class. Check as a class and correct the - Stand up and say aloud pronunciation, if necessary 3. Listen and tick . Then write and say aloud: - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the four - Look and do the task sentences and tick the correct words - Ask them to look at the sentences and guess the - Listence and tick Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(96) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 words to fill the gaps - Play the recording so they can listen and tick the words. Remind ps to focus on the words with the letters sk and xt while listening. - Check their answers - Play the recording again - Swap and check - Get ps to swap and check their answers. - Control and offer help if necessary - Ask ps to read aloud the sentences - Read aloud - Key : 1a 2a 3 a 4b 4. Let’s chant : Tell pupils that they are going to say the chant - Read the chant What’s he doing ? follow the procedure in teaching the unit components in introduction - Do choral and individual - Have them read the chant and check repetition until they get comprehention familiarized with the - Play the recording more than one, if necessary pronunciation of the chant - Show ps how to chant and do the action - Chant and TPR - Divide the class into group of four and call two group of ps to give the demonstration - Work in GR of four - G1 chant the question the other chant the answers - Practise chanting and doing the - Ask group to sit opposite of each other action - Go around and offer help if necessary - Call two group to the front of the class chant and - perform in front of the class do the action. The rest of the class claps along the rhythm 5.Reinforcement - Sing along to reinforce - play the recording again pronunciation - Under line the words contain sounds sk and xt Period : 59 UNIT 9 WHAT ARE THEY DOING ? Lesson 3 part (4 ,5 6 ) I : Objectives : - By the end of the lesson pupils will be able to read and find out information to tick T or F in the sentences - Apply the languages learnt to write the missing words II : Languege focus : 1. Vocabulary 2.Sentence pattern: - What is he / she doing ? He/she is + verb + ing - What are they doing ? They’re + verb + ing III : Resources : 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV : Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Warm up : Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(97) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 -Revising the previous lesson . Get three groups of four to go to the front of the class to say the chant What’s the he doing ? and do action. Ask the rest of the class to listen and clap their hands 2 .Read and tick : Tell pupils that they are going to read the text about what the pupils are doing and tick T for true statements and F for false statements - Ask them to look at the statements first and then read the text , focusing on the information they need to do the task - What the characters are doing ? - Get pupils to work in pairs or small groups - Give ps times to do the task independently - Go around offering help - Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class - Provide explanations to the answers ( if necessary ) Key : 1F 2 F 3 F 4T 5 F 3. Write about the picture Tell pupils that they are going to write a paragraph to describle what the pupils are doing in their Art lesson , using words cues. - Have them look at the given words and guess what are they goingto write. Then ask them to look at the picture and find out what the teacher , the girl and the boys are doing. - Have pupils work in pairs or goups to discuss what they are going to write - Swap their answers before checking as a class - Key : The teacher is drawing a mask on the board. The girls are making puppets and painting masks. The boys are making akite and painting houses 4 .Project : Tell pupils that they are going to choose a photo of their family and discrible what each of the family menbers is doing in the photo - Ask them to look at their photo and find out what each person is doing . Then they should think of the words needed to discrible the picture and make notes, eg. Mum – cooking , kitchen; dad – reading, living room ; sister – learning English , living room - Get some pupils to do a demonstration in front of the class as an example before starting the activity Example : - My mum is cooking in the kitchen . My dad is Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. - Sing and do actions. - Listen to teacher’s instructions - Read the text - Look at the text and do your task - Pairs or groups work - Do the task - Swap and check - Take note if necessary. - Look and listen. - Look at the given words and do the task - Work in pairs or group to discuss what they are going to write - Swap and check each other - Take note and repair ( if necessary ) - Listen to the teacher’s instruction.

(98) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 reading in the living room . My sister is learing - Look at the photo and brain English in the living room storm to say out activities of - Key : Pupils’own answers each family’s menber is doing 5.Reinforcement -To express the activities is happening at the moment - Repeat in chorus of the speaking we use sentence partterns: What is he/ she doing ? He/she is + V + ing - some pupils go to the class What are they doing ? and demonstrate their photos They’re + V + ing. Period 60 Unit 10. Where were you yesterday? Lesson 1(1,2) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - use the words and phrases related to the topic past activities - ask and answer questions about someone is doing , using Where were you yesterday? – I was… II. Language focus * Vocabulary : words related to the topic past activities * Structures : Where were you yesterday? – I was… III. Teaching aids - A tape, handmade puppets, flashcards of the photographs of people. IV. Procedure Teacher’s activities Students’s activities 1. Warm up E.g: My mother is working in - ask S to tell what their family members are doing the hospital at the moment My father is playing chess 2. New lesson 2. 1. Look, listen and repeat 2. 1. Look, listen and repeat - tell S that they are going to find out about how to ask and answer questions about where someone was yesterday - have them look at the pictures and discuss the context - play the recording for S to listen and repeat for a few times - ask S to role play 2. 2. Point and say - call some pairs of S to role play in front of the class 2. 2. Point and say - tell S that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about where someone was in - write new phrases and the past sentence pattern in the - have them look at the bubbles and identify where notebooks the people were yesterday Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(99) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - teach how to use “to be” with the past Was is used with singular pronoun Were is used with plural ones - teach the phrases: at home, at the zoo, on the beach, in the school library - point to the first picture and teach them sentence pattern: Where were you yesterday?- I was at home. - get them to practice asking and answering with the words given - call on some pairs to act out the dialogues in front of the class * Work in pairs: - ask S to work in pairs: ask your partners where they were yesterday - select some pairs to demonstrate the task in front of the class 3. Consolidation In this lesson, S have learnt about past activities and asking- answering Where were you yesterday? 4. Homelink - practice singing the song at home. - read new words. - practise. - read the lyrics. - learn to sing the song. V. Evaluation. ......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(100) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017. WEEK:16 Date of teaching: from 19 /12 to 24 /12 /2016 Period 61 Unit 10. Where were you yesterday? Lesson 1 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - use the words and phrases related to the topic past activities - ask and answer questions about someone is doing , using Where were you yesterday? – I was… - Improve listening, speaking, reading, writing skills. II. Language focus * Vocabulary : words related to the topic past activities * Structures : Where were you yesterday? – I was… III. Teaching aids - A tape, handmade puppets, flashcards of the photographs of people. IV. Procedure Teacher’s activities Students’s activities 1. Warm up E.g: My mother is working in - ask S to tell what their family members are doing the hospital at the moment My father is playing chess 2. New lesson 2. 3. Listen and tick - tell S that they are going to listen to three 2. 3. Listen and tick dialogues about where the characters were and tick the correct pictures - have them look at the pictures, identify the similarities and differences - listen and tick the correct - play the recording for S to listen and do the task answers - get them to swap the answers Key: 1c 2b 3a 2. 4. Look and write - tell S that they are going to complete the 2. 4. Look and write sentences about where the characters were - have them look at the questions and discuss the missing words they need to fill - give them time to do the task indipendently - get S to swap the answers Key: 1 at home/ in the kitchen 2. 5. Let’s sing 2 in the library/ at school - tell S that they are going to sing the song Where 3 on the beach were you yesterday? - have them read each line of the lyrics aloud - play the recording all the way through for S to 2. 5. Let’s sing Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(101) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 listen and repeat - play the recording again for S sing along with the recording - read the lyrics - divide the class into two groups: one sings the questions and the other sings the answers. The rest of the class sings the song together, clapping hands 3. Consolidation - learn to sing the song In this lesson, S have learnt about past activities and asking- answering Where were you yesterday? 4. Homelink - practice singing the song at home Period :62 Unit 10. Where were you yesterday? Lesson 2-P1 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - use the words and phrases related to the topic past activities - ask and answer questions about what someone did in the past, using What did you do yesterday? – I + V-ed - Improve listening, speaking, reading, writing skills. II. Language focus * Vocabulary : words related to the topic past activities * Structures : What did you do yesterday? – I + V-ed III. Teaching aids - A tape, handmade puppets, flashcards of the photographs of people. IV. Procedure Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up - call some S to the front of the class to sing the song Where were you yesterday? 2. New lesson 2. 1. Look, listen and repeat 2. 1. Look, listen and repeat - tell S that they are going to read a story about where S ask and answer questions about what they did in the past - have them look at the pictures to identify the characters and discuss the context in which the language is used - play the recording for S to listen and repeat for a few times - ask S to role play - call some pairs of S to role play in front of the class 2. 2. Point and say 2. 2. Point and say - tell S that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about what someone did in Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(102) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 the past - ask S to look at the pictures and identify what the pupils did yesterday - teach them the phrases under the pictures - write new phrases and sentence Played badminton pattern in the notebooks Painted a picture Watered the flowers - ask them to look at pictures and repeat the - read the words under the pictures activities under the pictures - point to the first picture and teach them sentence - practise pattern: What did you do yesterday?- I played a. What did you do yesterday? badminton - I played badminton. - get them to practice asking and answering with b. What did you do yesterday? the words given - I painted a picture - call on some pairs to act out the dialogues in c. What did you do yesterday? front of the class - I watered the flowers 3. Consolidation In this lesson, S have learnt about past activities and asking- answering What did you do yesterday?- I + V-ed 4. Homelink - practice reading the past verbs Period :63 Unit 10. Where were you yesterday? Lesson 2-P2 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - use the words and phrases related to the topic past activities - ask and answer questions about what someone did in the past, using What did you do yesterday? – I + V-ed - Improve listening, speaking, reading, writing skills. II. Language focus * Vocabulary : words related to the topic past activities * Structures : What did you do yesterday? – I + V-ed III. Teaching aids - A tape, handmade puppets, flashcards of the photographs of people. IV. Procedure Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up - call some S to the front of the class to sing the song Where were you yesterday? 2. New lesson 2. 3. Let’s talk - tell S that they are going to revise what they have 2. 3. Let’s talk learnt in lesson 1 and lesson 2, using Where were you yesterday? What did they do yesterday? Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(103) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - ask S to work in pairs - select some pairs to role play in front of the class 2. 4. Listen and number - tell S that they are going to listen to four dialogues about where Linda was and what she did and number the pictures - have them look at the pictures to identify what the character in each picture is doing - give them time to do the task in pairs - get S to swap the answers 2. 5. Look and write - tell S that they are going to complete the answers to the questions about where the characters were and what they did - give S time to do the task independently - get them to swap their answers 2.6. Let’s play - tell S that they are going to play the game Pelmanism - prepare two sets of cards, one with present activities and the other with the same activities in past form - play in groups: one S selects two crads, if the cards show the same activities, he will get one point - the game ends when all the cards are gone - call on a group to act out the game in front of the class 3. Consolidation In this lesson, S have learnt about past activities and asking- answering What did you do yesterday?I + V-ed 4. Homelink - practice reading the past verbs. - pair work 2. 4. Listen and number. Key: a3 b1. c2. 2. 5. Look and write Key: 1in the garden, watered the flowers 2in the bedroom, watched TV 3on the beach, played football 2.6. Let’s play. Period :64 - Unit 10. Where were you yesterday? Lesson 3- P1 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will have been able to pronounce the sounds of the letters ed in the words played, watched, painted respectively. II. Language focus: - Vocabulary and structures: Review - Phonics: ed III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: audio, recordings, chalk, book , pictures 2. Students’: student’s book, notebook, pen,. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(104) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 IV. Procedure: Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up. - Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson by playing the game Pelmanism with activities in the present and past tenses 2. New lesson 2. 1. Listen and repeat. - Tell pupils that they are going to practise saying the sounds of the letters ed in the words played, watched, painted respectively. - Put the letters ed on the board. Play the recording and ask pupils to repeat a few times. Then put the words played, watched, painted and the three sentences on the board. Play the recording more than once, if necessary, and let pupils say the words and the sentences, paying attention to the target sounds. - Do choral and individual repetition of the sounds, words and sentences until pupils feel confident. - Get some pupils to say the sentences in front of the class. Correct the pronunciation, if necessary. 2. 2. Listen and tick. Then write and say aloud. - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording, circle the correct answers and write the words in the blanks. - Give pupils a few seconds to read the sentences in silence and guess how the verbs played, watched, painted are pronounced - play the recording more than once for S to listen and tick the correct boxes - Have pupils swap their answers before checking as a class. Go around offering help, if necessary. - Get pupils to read the sentences aloud. Key: 1/d/ 2/t/ 3/Id? 2. 3. Let’s chant - Tell pupils that they are going to say the chant What did he do yesterday? - Have pupils read the chant and check comprehension. - Play the recording a few times for pupils to do choral and individual repetition. Show them how to chant and do actions. - Put the class into two groups to practice chanting and doing actions. Each of the groups should sing. Students’ activities 1. Warm up. - Whole class 2. New lesson 2. 1. Listen and repeat. - look at the board - listen and repeat - practice. - Whole class 2. 2. Listen and tick… - Individual - Pair work - listen and do the task - Whole class - Group work. 2. 3. Let’s chant What did he do yesterday?. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(105) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 one verse of the chant. Go around offering help, if necessary. - Call two pairs to the front of the class to chant and do actions. The rest of the class claps along to the rhythm. 3. Consolidation:- Recall the main content. 4. Homelink:- Prepare the next period.. V. Evaluation. ......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(106) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017. WEEK:17. Date of teaching: from 26 /12/2015 to 31 /12 /2016 Period : 65- Unit 10. Where were you yesterday? Lesson 3- P2 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will have been able to pronounce the sounds of the letters ed in the words played, watched, painted respectively. II. Language focus:- Vocabulary and structures: Review - Phonics: ed III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: audio, recordings, chalk, book , pictures 2. Students’: student’s book, notebook, pen,. IV. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up. 1. Warm up. - Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson by playing the game Pelmanism with activities in - Whole class the present and past tenses 2. New lesson 2. New lesson 2. 3. Let’s chant 2. 3. Let’s chant - Tell pupils that they are going to say the chant What did he do yesterday? What did he do yesterday? - Have pupils read the chant and check comprehension. - Play the recording a few times for pupils to do choral and individual repetition. Show them how to chant and do actions. - Put the class into two groups to practice chanting and doing actions. Each of the groups should sing one verse of the chant. Go around offering help, if necessary. - Call two pairs to the front of the class to chant and do actions. The rest of the class claps along to the rhythm. 2.4. Read and complete 2.4. Read and complete - tell S that they are going to read the text and - look and guess complete the sentences - get them to read the text and incomplete sentences - do the task and elicit what words they need to fill the gaps Key: 1watered the flowers in the - give S time to do the task independently garden - get them to swap the answers 2played chess with her father 2.5.Write about you 3watched TV - tell S that they are going to write a short 2.5.Write about you paragraph about themselves - have S work in pairs or groups to discuss what - do the task they did yesterday - give S time to do the task independently Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(107) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - get them to swap the answers 2. 6. Project 2. 6. Project E.g: Hello, everyone. I interviewed - tell S that they are going to do an interview with Thu. Last weekend, Thu was on one of their classmates about where he/she was and the beach. She played badminton what he/she did last weekend and report to the class with her friends. They went - ask them work in pairs swimming in the sea. They had - Get some S to report to the class dinner in a restaurant. They were 3. Consolidation:- Recall the main content. very happy. 4. Homelink:- Prepare the next period. Period :66+67- Review 2 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - listen and identify specific information related to the theme Me and my School - read and identify specific information related to the theme Me and my School - describe pictures - read, listen and understand a short story - Improve listening, speaking, reading, writing skills. II. Language focus * Vocabulary : words related to the theme Me and my School: III. Teaching aids - A tape, handmade puppets, flashcards of the photographs of people. IV. Procedure 1. Warm up 2. New lesson 2.1. Listen and tick - tell S that they are going to listen to 4 dialogues and tick 2.1. Listen and tick the correct pictures - give S a few seconds to look at the pictures and elicit information about pictures - look at the pictures - play the recording 3 times for S to listen, do the task and - listen and do the task check the answers - get S to swap the answers Key: 1c 2b 3a 4d 2. 2. Read and circle - tell S that they are going to read the text and circle the 2. 2. Read and circle correct answers - give S time to read the text in silence - give S time to do the task - read and do the task - do choral and individual repetation of the text Key: 1a 2b 3a 4c 2. 3. Read and match 2. 3. Read and match - tell S that they are going to read and match the questions on the left with the answers on the right - give S a few seconds to read the questions and the - read the questions and answers in silence the answers in silence - give S time to do the task Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(108) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - get S to swap the answers Key: 1d 2e 3a 4b 5c 2. 4. Look and write - tell S that they are going to look at the pictures and questions and write the answers - give S a few seconds to read the questions in silence - give S time to do the task individually - get S to swap the answers Key: 1It’ s in Binh Minh village 2I/ We have English, Science, Vietnamese and Maths 3He’s playing basketball. She’s listening to music 4They were on the beach. They played football 2. 5. Let’s write - tell S that they are going to read the incompete text and fill the gaps - give S time to look at the pictures and read the text in silence - give S time to do the task - get S to swap the answers Key: 1listening to music, 2playing chess 3skipping rope’ 4reading a book. 2. 4. Look and write. - do the task individually. 2. 5. Let’s write - look at the text and fill the gaps. Period :68- Short story I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - read, listen and understand a short story - do some exercises - Improve listening, speaking, reading, writing skills. II. Language focus * Vocabulary : words related to the theme Me and my School III. Teaching aids - A tape, handmade puppets, flashcards of the photographs of people. IV. Procedure Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up 2.1 . Read and listen to the story 2. New lesson 2.1 . Read and listen to the story - tell S that they are going to read and listen to the - read the story story Cat and Mouse - answer the teacher’s questions - ask S to read in silence - ask them some questions: Who is Mary? What can - listen and repeat she do? What game are the cats playing? - play roles - play the recording for S to listen and repeat 2. 2. Complete the conversation - ask S to play roles 2. 2. Complete the conversation - tell S that they are going to read the conversation - read te text and fill the gaps - do the task Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(109) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - give S a few seconds to read the text in silence - give them time to do the task - get S to swap the answers Key: 1day 2Monday 3date 4fifth 5birthday 6having a party 2. 3. Work in pairs - tell S that they are going to read and answer the questions - give S a few seconds to read the story again Then read the questions and answer them in pairs - give them time to do the task - ask some pairs to ask and answer Key: 1. It’s Maurice’s birthday. 2. It’s red 3. They’re playing blind man’s bluff 4. Four cats 5. He’s five years old 2.4. Write the correct answers to activity 3 - tell S that the five statements are the answers to the questions in Activity 3 but they are wrong, so S should correct them - give S a few seconds to read the first correct answer as an example - give them time to do the task - get S to swap the answers Key: 2. No, it isn’t. It’s red. 2. No, they aren’t. They’re playing blind man’s bluff 3. No, four cats are playing games 4. No, he isn’t. He’s five. 2. 3. Work in pairs. - ask and answer. 2.4. Write the correct answers …. - do the task. V. Evaluation. .......................................................................................................................................... WEEK:18. Date of teaching: from 2 /1/2016 to 7 /1 /2017 Period : 69- 70 Test Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(110) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Test Exercise 1: Write sentences, using the words given 1. There/ eighteen students/ my class 6. How often/ you/ have English/ a week ………………………………… ………………………………… 2. I/ student/ Tran Phu Primary School 7. How many/ pens/ you have got? ………………………………… ………………………………… 3. My school/ small/ beautiful 8. What/ Linda/ look like? ………………………………… ………………………………… 4. There / ten classes/ my school 9. My brother/ short/ fat. ………………………………… ………………………………… 5. there/ twenty teachers/ my school 10. Where/ your ruler? ………………………………… Exercise 2: Complete the sentences 1. My school is…… Thanh Binh village 2. There is a pen …… the desk 3. There are four people…… in my family. 4. It is hot…….summer. 5. My sister is ……nurse. 6. My father is…….engineer. 7. ……you want a car? 8. ……Lan and Ha fat? 9. Can you speak Chinese? No, I …… 10. What subject ….. you like? Exercise 3: Find and correct the mistakes in the following sentences 1. My mother are a doctor. 2. We are teacher. 3. Are she nice? 4. This is my sister. His name is Hien. 5. That are my father. He is a engineer. 6. Can you sings a song? 7. My birthday is on May. 8. What is the date today? It’s the five of November. 9. What day is it today? It’s a Monday. 10. What lessons has you got on Friday? Exercise 4: Circle the correct answers 1. This gift is…. you A. for B. Is C. on 2.Wouldyou like…….banana? A. a B. An C. one 3. Do you like Music? Yes, I…… A. do B. am C. like 4. I don’t like Maths……….it’s difficult A. and B. because C. but 5. How many…….are there? There is one pens A. pencils B. pen C. pens Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(111) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 6. Can you drink……….? Yes, I can. A.orange juice B. rice C. bread 7. ……..is the weather? It’s……. A. how/ cloudy B. How’s/ cloudy C. how/ cloud 8. Where is Trang An school? It’s ……Quang Trung street A. on B. in C. at 9. What …….. have you got today? A. subject B. subjects C. many subjects 10. The maps are ……. the wall A. in B. on C. at Test E1: Write sentences, using the words given 1. when / birthday / is / your/ ? ……………………………………….. 2. I/ cannot / football / play. ………………………………………. 3. My school/ has/ beautiful/ a / garden. ………………………………………. 4. There / ten classes/ my school ………………………………………. 5. there/ twenty teachers/ my school …………………………………….. 6. How often/ you/ have English/ a week ………………………………………. 7. How many/ lessons/ today / you / have / got? …………………………………………. 8. What/ Linda/ look like? ………………………………………. 9. what / mother / like / look / does / your? ……………………………………….. 10. how / often / got / you / have / Maths? ……………………………………….. E2: Complete the sentences 1. My school is…… Thanh Binh village 2. I have English four …… a week. 3. What are they? …… are benches. 4. Today is ……. fith ……. January. 5. My sister is tall …... slim. 6. My father is…….engineer. 7. I can play badminton …… I can’t play basketball. 8. How ………. many pens have you got? 9. Can you speak Chinese? No, I …… 10. ……. is your favourite subject? Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(112) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 E3: Find and correct the mistakes in the following sentences 1. Linda is from England. 2. She is England. 3. Are she American? 4. My birthday is on May. 5. Where is Trang An school? It’s at Nguyen Du Street. 6. Can you sings a song? 7. My birthday is in May 2nd. 8. What are they? They are pencil box. 9. What day is it today? It’s a Monday. 10. What lessons has you got on Friday? E4: Circle the correct answers 1. This gift is…. you A. for B. Is C. on 2. Would you like…….banana? A. a B. An C. one 3. Do you like Music? Yes, I…… A. do B. am C. like 4. I don’t like Maths……….it’s difficult A. and B. because C. but 5. How many…….are there? There is one pens A. pencils B. pen C. pens 6. Can you drink……….? Yes, I can. A.orange juice B. rice C. bread 7. ……..is the weather? It’s……. A. how/ cloudy B. How’s/ cloudy C. how/ cloud 8. Where is Trang An school? It’s ……Quang Trung street A. on B. in C. at 9. What …….. have you got today? A. subject B. subjects C. many subjects 10. The maps are ……. the wall A. in B. on C. at E5: Read and answer the questions Hello, my name is David. I am ten years old. I am a student of Wooden primary School. I’m in class 4a. There are nine boys and sixteen girls in my class. In my classroom, there is a big board, a cupboard and a new clock. There are some paintings and two maps on the wall. My classroom is large and beautiful. 1. What is his name? → …………………….. 2. How old is he? → ………………………. 3. How many students are there in his class? → …………………………. 4. Is there a board in his class? → ……………………. 5. How many maps are there in his class? → ………………………….. 6. Is his classroom small? → ………………………….. Test Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(113) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 E1: Reorder the words to make sentences 1. are / ten/ there/ in/ the/ students/ classroom. ………………………………. 2. can/ do/ she/ puzzles/ ? …………………………………… 3. do/ live/ you/ where? ………………………………………………… 4. do/ you/ have/ when/ Vietnamese? …………………………………………………… 5. likes/ my/ English/ much/ very. ……………………………………………. 6. to/ does/ time/ what/ bed/ he/ go? ………………………………… 7. monkeys/ like/ because/ I / can/ they/ swing. ………………………………… 8. you/ basketball/ can/ play? …………………………………… 9. a / music/ there/ in/ is/ school/ room/ my. …………………………………… 10. class/ what/ in/ she/ is? ……………………………….. E2: Complete the sentences, using the words given a. your, her, his, she, father, does, where, works A: What’s your mother’s name? B: ………name is Huong. A: How old is………? B: She’s thirty- seven A: What …….. she do? B: She’s a nurse. A: ……….does she work? B: She …… .. at Bach Mai hospital. b. England, where, April, when, ten, how A: Tony, ……….are you from? B: I’m from……………. A: ………. old are you? B: I’m ………. A: ………. is your birthday? B: It’s in ………… E3: Choose the correct answers 1. These ……. My pens. They are on the table. A. Are B. is C. it 2. How …….. books are there? A. about B. are C. many 3. What time…….. she get up? A. do B. does C. is Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(114) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 4.He…….a cat and a dog. A. have B. is C. has 5. Nam …….up at 7 o’clock. A. gats B. get C. is get 6. ......... do you have Art? A. what B. when C. how 7. I don’t like Maths because it is a............subject A. fine B. difficult C. interesting 8. He can ......... with yoyo A. play B. go C. playing 9. ..........Tom......... a kite now? A. Is/ flying B. Is/ x C. Does/ be 10. Yes, he........ A. do B. isn’t C. Is 11. What do you do............during Maths lessons? A. on B. in C. during 12. My birthday is.......... November 28th 2003. A. in B. at C. on 13. These ........are nice A. flowers B. pen C. pens 14. I am ........... I want a cake. A. thirsty B. tired C. hungry 15. Can he .......... English? A. play B. speak C. Say. V. Evaluation. ......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... WEEK 19. Date of teaching: from 16/ 1 to 21 /1 /2017 Period 71 +72 : Unit 11. What time is it? Lesson 1. I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(115) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - use the words and phrases related to the topic daily routines - ask and answer questions about time , using What time is it?- It’s + (time) - Improve listening, speaking, reading, writing skills. II. Language focus * Vocabulary : words related to the topic daily routines * Structures : What time is it?- It’s + (time) III. Teaching aids - A tape, handmade puppets, flashcards of the photographs of people. IV. Procedure Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up - ask S to revise numbers: five, ten, fifteen.. 2. New lesson 2. 1. Look, listen and repeat - tell S that they are going to learn how to ask and answer questions about time - have them look at the pictures and discuss the context - play the recording for S to listen and repeat for a few times - ask S to role play - call some pairs of S to role play in front of the class 2. 2. Point and say - tell S that they are going to practice asking and answering questions time, using What time is it?- It’s + (time) - have them look at the bubbles and say the numbers under the pictures - point to the first picture and ask S What time is it?, have them answer It’s seven o’clock - do choral and individual repetation, then ask them to practice in pairs - get them to practice asking and answering with the other pictures - call on some pairs to act out the dialogues in front of the class * Work in pairs: - ask S to work in pairs: ask your partners What time is it now? - select some pairs to demonstrate the task in front of the class - call one S to write down the answers on the board 2. 3. Listen and tick - tell S that they are going to listen to three dialogues. 2. 1. Look, listen and repeat - answer questions about time - listen and repeat. 2. 2. Point and say. - write new phrases and sentence pattern in the notebooks - read new words. - practise. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(116) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 about time and tick the correct pictures 2. 3. Listen and tick - have them look at the pictures to identify the time - play the recording for S to listen and do the task - get them to swap the answers 2. 4. Look and write - listen and tick the correct - tell S that they are going to write the answers to the answers questions What time is it? with the picture cues - have them look at the clock and the answer in picture 1. then ask them to look at other clocks and Key: 1b 2b 3a use the appropriate words to complete the answers 2. 4. Look and write - give them time to do the task independently - get S to swap the answers 2. 5. Let’s sing - tell S that they are going to sing the song What time is it? - have them read each line of the lyrics aloud - play the recording all the way through for S to listen and repeat Key: 2 It’s ten twenty - play the recording again for S sing along with the 3 It’s ten thirty recording 4It’s eleven fifty - divide the class into two groups: one sings the 2. 5. Let’s sing questions and the other sings the answers. The rest of the class sings the song together, clapping hands 3. Consolidation - read the lyrics In this lesson, S have learnt about daily routines and - learn to sing the song asking- answering What time is it? 4. Homelink - practice singing the song at home Period 73 +74 : Unit 11. What time is it? Lesson 2 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - use the words and phrases related to the topic daily routines - ask and answer questions about daily routines, using What time do you…?- I … at + (time) - Improve listening, speaking, reading, writing skills. II. Language focus * Vocabulary : words related to the topic daily routines * Structures : What time do you…?- I … at + (time) III. Teaching aids - A tape, handmade puppets, flashcards of the photographs of people. IV. Procedure Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(117) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - ask S to sing the song What time is it? 2. New lesson 2. 1. Look, listen and repeat - tell S that they are going to learn how to ask and answer questions about daily routines - have them look at the pictures to understand the context in which the language is used - explain that in the first picture: Tony: What time do you get up? Linda: Six o’clock - play the recording for S to listen and repeat for a few times - ask S to role play - call some pairs of S to role play in front of the class 2. 2. Point and say - tell S that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about the time for daily activities - have them look at the bubbles, teach them new phrases - point to the first picture and get one S to ask What time do you get up?, have another answer I get up at six o’clock - do choral and individual repetation, then ask them to practice in pairs - repeat the same procedure with the rest of the pictures - get them to practice asking and answering with the other pictures - call on some pairs to act out the dialogues in front of the class 2. 3. Let’s talk - tell S that they are going to revise what they have learnt in Lesson 1 and Lesson 2 - have them work in pairs: one S asks the questions What time is it? What time do you …?, and the other gives the answers - call on some pairs to act out the dialogues in front of the class - ask some S to talk about their daily activities: I get up at six o’clock. I have breakfast at six thirty and I go to school at seven o’clock… 2. 4. Listen and draw the time - tell S that they are going to listen to Tom’s daily routines and draw the hands of the clock - focus their attention on the pictures and discuss what Tom does everyday. Then ask them to look at the clock and guide how to draw the hands to show the time - play the recording more than once for S to listen and do the task - get S to swap the answers Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. 2. 1. Look, listen and repeat. - writen new sentence pattern in the notebooks - listen and repeat 2. 2. Point and say - write new phrases in the notebooks Get up Have breakfast Have dinner Go to bed - read new words - practise 2. 3. Let’s talk - pair work. 2. 4. Listen and draw the time. Key: b7.30 d8.00. c8.15 e9.00. 2. 5. Draw and write the.

(118) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 2. 5. Draw and write the time - tell S that they are going to draw the time and write about their daily routines - First, ask them to look at the questions and identify what daily routines they are going to write about. Then have them draw the hands of the clocks to show the time they usually do these activities. Finally,get them to write the answers to the questions, using the clcoks they have drawn - set a time limit for S to do the task independently - get them to swap the answers 2. 6. Let’s play - tell S that they are going to play the game Pass the secret - divide the class into groups of six or seven, ask them to sit in circles. S1 in each circle whispers a sentence to S2, continue until the last has heard the sentence and say it aloud. The group that says the snetence correctly in the shortest time will win the game - call on one group to act out the game in front of the class 3. Consolidation In this lesson, S have learnt about daily routines and askinganswering What time do you …?- I … at …. 4. Homelink - practice telling the time about daily activities at home. time - listen to the T about how to do the task. 2. 6. Let’s play - do the task. V. Evaluation. ......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... WEEK 20. Date of teaching: from / to / /2016 Period 75 : Unit 11. What time is it? Lesson 3 (1, 2, 3). I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students are able to: + pronounce the sounds of the letters oo in the words cook, book, noon and school respectively, + listen to the recording and write the words in the blanks of the sentences, Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(119) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 + sing the chant “What time do you go to school?” II. Language focus: Phonics: oo – cook, book, noon, school. III. Resources: - Student’s book, computer, recording, projectors, speakers.. IV. Procedures: Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up. - Get Ps to play the “Daily activities” game. Give some pictures about daily activities, get Ps to look at the pictures and choose the right words under the pictures.. 2. Listen and repeat. - Tell Ss that they are going to practice saying the sounds of the letters oo in the words cook, book, noon and school respectively. - Put the phonics letters oo on the board and say them a few times. - Pronounce the sound of the letters “oo” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times (the whole class, in groups, individuals). - Pronounce the sound of the word “cook” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times (the whole class, in groups, individuals). - Play the recording the sentence “My mother cooks at six o’clock” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times (the whole class, in groups, individuals). - Pronounce the sound of the word “noon” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times (the whole class, in groups, individuals). - Play the recording the sentence “I play football at noon.” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times.( the whole class, in groups, individuals) - Pronounce the sound of the word “school” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times. Students’ activities - Play the game.. - Listen to T. - Look at the board. - Listen and repeat. - Observe. - Listen and repeat. - Listen and repeat.. - Observe. - Listen and repeat. - Listen and repeat.. - Observe. - Listen and repeat.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(120) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 (the whole class, in groups, individuals). - Play the recording the sentence “I have lunch at school.” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times (the whole class, in groups, individuals). - Pronounce the sound of the word “cook” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times (the whole class, in groups, individuals). - Play the recording the sentence “My mother cooks at six o’clock” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times (the whole class, in groups, individuals). Do choral repetition of the words and sentences until Ss feel confident. - Call on some Ps to say the words and sentences. 3. Listen and write. Then say aloud. - Tell Ps that they are going to listen to the recording and write the words in the blanks of the sentences. - Give the class a few second to read the sentences in silence and guess the words to fill in the blanks. - Play the recording all the way through for Ss to listen. - Play the second time and ask Ss to do the task. - Have Ss check their answers in pairs, then ask some Ss to report their answer to the class. - Gives the best answers. Key: 1. book, 2. school, 3. cook, 4. noon 4. Let’s chant. - Tell Ss that they are going to sing the chant What time do you go to school? - Give a few seconds for Ss to sing the chant. Check comprehension. - Say each line of the chant, then have Ss repeat it a few ties. Give a demonstration of chanting and clapping the rhythm. - Divide class into two groups: one group chants the questions and the other chants the answers. - Get groups of Ss to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Go around and offer help, if necessary.. - Listen and repeat.. - Observe. - Listen and repeat. - Listen and repeat.. - Say the words and sentences. - Listen carefully. - Read the sentences in silence and guess the words to fill in the blanks. - Listen the recording. - Listen the recording and do the task. - Check their answers in pairs - Some Ps report their answer to the class.. - Look at the chant and listen to the teacher. - Sing the chant. - Repeat each line of the chant. - Work in 2 groups. - Sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(121) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Call two groups to the front of the class to chant and do the actions. The rest of the class - Chant and do the actions. claps along to the rhythm. 5. Reinforcement. - Get Ps to work in pairs to sing the new chant by replacing some phrases: go to school, - Sing the new chant. seven o’clock, school into get up, six o’clock, get up…… - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the language. Period 76 Unit 11: What time is it? Lesson 3 (4, 5, 6) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + read the text about Phong’s daily routines and complete the sentences, + write a short paragraph about Linda’s daily routines, using the picture cues, + do a project about their daily routines. II. Languages focus 1. Vocabulary: go home, homework. 2. Sentence pattern (review): What time do you get up? I get up at six o’clock. III. Resources Student’s book, recording, computer, projector, speakers. IV. Procedure: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Warm up - Get sts to sing the chant What time do you go to - Sing the chant and do the school on page 10 and do the actions. actions. 2. Read and complete. - Tell Ps that they are going to read the text about Phong’s daily routines and complete the sentences. - Give them to read the sentences. - Tell them that they are going to have to fill in the - Look at the text blanks with the times that Phong does the activities. - Have them read the text to find information they need to complete the task. - Read the sentences. - Give Ss time to do the task independently. - Listen to T. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Let Ps trade their answers in pairs for the correction. - Look at the task and discuss - Call on some pupils to report their answers. how to do this one. - Comment and provide key: - Do the task independently. Key: 1, 7a.m/ seven 2, 5/ five (o’clock) 3, has dinner 4, goes to bed. * Language note: Draw Ps’ attention to the third - Trade their answers in pairs person singular forms of the verbs (e.g. go -> goes, for the correction. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(122) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 watch -> watches, have ->has, do ->does). 3. Let’s write. - Tell them that they are going to write a short paragraph about Linda’s daily routines, using the picture cues. - Have them work in pairs to discuss what words they are going to write. Focus Ps on what activities Linda does and the time she does these activities by looking at the clock. Remind them to write the verbs in the third person singular (e.g. has breakfast, goes to school, watches TV, goes to bed). - Give Ps time to do the task independently. - Go through the task with the whole class and let them do this individually. - Let Ps trade their answers in pairs for the correction. - Ask two Ps to write down their answers on the board and check. - Check and correct mistakes. Key: She has breakfast at six forty – five. She goes to school at seven. She watches TV at eight thirty. And she goes to bed at nine fifteen. - Call on some Ss to read aloud the completed sentences. 4. Project. - Tell ss that they are going to do a project about their daily routines. - Give each P a card. Have Ps copy the table from the book onto their cards. - Give them time to write the information about themselves. - Get Ps to swap their cards in pairs. They should look their partners’ cards and describe their daily routines. - Call some Ps to the front of the class to tell the class about their partners. Key: P’s own answers. 5. Reinforcement - Have Ps work in pairs to do the task “Reorder the pictures and write the sentences”.. - The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Observe.. - Listen to the T. - Work in pairs to discuss what words they are going to write.. - Do the task independently. - Go through the task with the T. - Trade their answers in pairs for the correction. - Check and correct mistakes. - Read aloud the completed sentences. - Listen carefully. - Copy the table from the book onto their cards. - Write the information about themselves. - Swap their cards in pairs. - Report their answers. - Comment and correct. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(123) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 mistakes - Work in pairs to do the task.. - Listen and remember.. ……………………………………….. ……………………………………….. ……………………………………….. ……………………………………….. ……………………………………….. ……………………………………….. - Check. Period 77. Unit 12: What does your father do? Lesson 1 (1, 2). I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about job, using: What does your father do? He’s a/an + job. II. Languages focus: 1. Vocabulary: job, farmer, nurse, driver, factory worker, uncle. 2. Sentence pattern: What does your father do? He’s a/an + job. III. Resources: - Student’s book, computer, recording, projectors, speakers.. IV. Procedure: Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up. - Greeting. - Ask Ps some questions to check the old lesson. - Play a video about jobs. - Ask Ss to watch carefully and identify the jobs and then sing along. - Check and give feedback. - Introduce the main topic of the lesson - Introduce the vocabulary ( using the pictures on the media): + job + nurse. Students’ activities Answer the questions. - Watch the video carefully. - Watch the video carefully and sing along. - Receive feedback and be ready for learn the new topic - Observe. - Listen and repeat. - Read aloud. - Listen to the teacher.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(124) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 + farmer + driver + factory worker - Get Ps to listen and repeat a few times (whole class, in groups, individuals). - Call on some Ps to read aloud the vocabulary. 2.Look, listen and repeat. - Tell Ps that they are going to learn to ask and answer questions about job. - Ask Ps to look at the four pictures to identify the characters and the context in which the language is used. Ask them questions such as Who are they? Where are they? What are they talking about? - Play the recording all the way through for Ps to listen. - Play the recording again for pupils to listen and repeat sentence by sentence. - Play the recording again for pupils to listen and repeat in groups. Group one repeats Miss Hien’s part, Group two repeats Nam’s part, Group three repeats Mai’s part. - Get Ps to work in groups to role play the dialogue between Miss Hien, Nam and Mai. - Call on some groups to demonstrate in front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Check Ps’ comprehension about the dialogue by using some questions: + What does Mai’s father do? + Is her mother a teacher? + Is Mai a student? 3. Point and say. - Tell pupils that they are going to ask and answer questions about the time, using: What does your ______ do? He’s/She’s ________. - Have Ps look at the bubbles to see how the questions and the answers are used. - Point to the first picture and model the task with one pupil, using the question in the first bubble and the phrase under the picture for the answer: + T: What does your father do? - Write the question and the answer on the board. Then ask Ps to repeat a few times.. - Look at the pictures and identify the characters and the context. - Answer the questions. (In picture a: Miss Hien tells her class to work in pairs abount the job. In picture b: Nam is asking Mai about her father’s job. using: “What does your father do?” and Mai answers: “He’s a teacher”. In picture c: Nam is asking Mai about her mother’s job. In picture d: : Nam is asking Mai about her sister’s job. - Listen to the recording. - Listen and repeat sentence by sentence. - Listen and repeat in groups.. - Work in groups to role play the dialogue. - Demonstrate in front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Answer: + He’s a teacher.. + No, she isn’t. + Yes, she is. - Listen to T’s instruction. - Look at the bubbles. - Look at the first picture and answer the question. P: He’s a farmer. - Listen and repeat.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(125) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Ask pupils to practice in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the picture cues. Monitor the activity and offer help, if necessary. - Select some pairs of Ps to demonstrate the task in front of the class. * Work in pairs. Ask your partners what time it is. - Tell pupils that they are going to ask and answer questions about the time, using: What does your ______ do? He’s/She’s _____ . - Select some pairs to role-play in front of the class. 4. Reinforcement. - Get Ps to sing the chant: What does your father do? He’s a doctor. He’s a doctor. What does your mother do? She’s a teacher. She’s a teacher. What does your sister? She’s a student. She’s a student. Yeah! Yeah! Yeah! Yeah! Yeah! Yeah! - Review the language of the lesson. Period 78. - Work in pairs: one asks the question and the other gives the answer. - The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Observe.. - Listen to T’s instruction. - Work in pairs to do the task. - Some pairs act out the dialogue.. Unit 12: What does your father do? Lesson 1 (3, 4, 5). I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to: + listen to three dialogues about job and tick the correct pictures, + write about someone’s job. + sing “My family” song. II. Languages focus (review): 1. Vocabulary: job, farmer, nurse, driver, factory worker, uncle. 2. Sentence pattern: What does your father do? He’s a doctor. III. Resources: - Student’s book, computer, recording, projectors, speakers.. IV. Procedure: Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up. - Greeting. - Get Ps to sing the chant: What does your father do? He’s a doctor. He’s a doctor. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. Students’ activities Greeting. - Sing the chant and do the actions..

(126) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 What does your mother do? She’s a teacher. She’s a teacher. What does your sister? She’s a student. She’s a student. Yeah! Yeah! Yeah! Yeah! Yeah! Yeah! 2. Listen and tick. - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to about Nam’s family and their job and tick the correct pictures. - Have Ps look at the pictures to identify the job. - Have Ps say the times aloud. Check understanding. - Play the recording all the way through for Ps to listen. - Play the recording again for pupils to listen and tick the correct pictures. Tell them that they should focus on where each pupil was. - Get pupils to swap their answers in pairs. - Call on some Ps to write their answers on the board. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Play the recording again for pupils to listen and check their answers. Key: Father: factory worker. Mother: teacher. Sister: nurse. 3. Look and write. - Tell Ps that they are going to write about someone’s job with the picture cues. - Give them a few seconds to look at the picture 1 and say aloud the word. Then have look at the other pictures and use the appropriate words to complete the sentences. - Give Ps time to do the task independently. Go around and offer help, if necessary. - Get Ps to compare their answers with their partners. - Call some Ps to read out their answers. If there is enough time, call some pairs to role-play the dialogues. Key: 1. family. 2. farmer. 3. is a nurse. 4. is a driver. 5.is a tailor. 6. is a student. 4. Let’s sing. - Tell Ps that they are going to sing the song My family Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. - Listen to the instruction. - Look at the pictures and identify: 1 a factory worker, 2. a farmer, 3. a tacher, 4. a nurse. - Say the job aloud. - Listen to the recording. - Listen to the recording to listen and tick the correct pictures. - Exchange their answers with their partners. - Write their answers on the board. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Listen and check their answers. - Look at the picture 1 and say aloud the word.. - Do the task individually. - Work in pairs to compare their answers. - Read out their answers. Correct their answers.. - Listen to the teacher..

(127) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Have Ps read each line of the lyrics aloud. Do choral and individual repetition and check comprehension. - Play the recording all the way through. - Ask Ps to do choral and individual repetition of the song line by line. - When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask two group of Ps to the front of the class. One group sings the questions and the other sings the answers. - Have the class sing the song again and clap their hands to reinforce the activity. 5. Reinforcement. - Give some pictures and practice asking and answering questions about job in a picture they like.. - Read each line of the lyrics. - Do choral and individual repetition - Listen to the recording. - Do choral and individual repetition of the song line by line. - The rest of the class sing together and clap hands. - Sing the song and clap hands. - Practice in pairs.. - Sum up the content of the lesson. V. Evaluation. ......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... WEEK 21 Date of teaching: from / 2 to /2 /2017 Period 79 Unit 12: What does your father do? Lesson 2 (1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(128) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about working places, using: Where does a________ work? A _______works______. II. Languages focus: 1. Vocabulary: work, clerk, in a hospital, in a field, in a factory, in an office. 2. Sentence pattern: Where does a doctor work? A doctor works in a hospital.. III. Resources: - Student’s book, computer, recording, projectors, speakers.. IV. Procedure: Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up. - Greeting. - Ask Ps to sing the song My family and do the actions - Introduce the vocabulary ( using the pictures on the media): + in a field + in a hospital + in a factory +in an office + clerk - Get Ps to listen and repeat a few times (whole class, in groups, individuals). - Call on some Ps to read aloud the vocabulary. 2. Look, listen and repeat. - Tell Ps that they are going to learn to ask and answer questions about working places. - Ask Ps to look at the four pictures to identify the characters and the context in which the language is used. Ask them questions such as Who are they? Where are they? What are they doing? - Explain that in the first picture Mai asks Nam to play a game And Nam say OK.In the second picture, Nam and Mai, ask and answer about a doctor’s working place, using Where does a doctor work? And In a hospal. In the last two pictures, Nam and Mai ask and answer about other working places.Check understanding. - Play the recording all the way through for Ps to listen. - Play the recording again for pupils to listen. Students’ activities - Sing the song and do the actions.. - Observe.. - Listen and repeat. - Read aloud. - Listen to the teacher. - Look at the pictures and identify the characters and the context. - Answer the questions. - Listen to T.. - Listen to the recording.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(129) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 and repeat sentence by sentence. - Play the recording again for pupils to listen and repeat in groups. Group one repeats Mai’s part, Group two repeats Nam’s part. - Get Ps to work in pairs to role play the dialogue between Mai and Nam. - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Check Ps’ comprehension about the dialogue by using some questions: + Where does a worker work? + Where does a farmer work? 3. Point and say. - Tell pupils that they are going to ask and answer questions about working places. Using: Where does a……….work? A….... works .................. - Have Ps look at the bubbles to see how the questions and the answers are used. Focus them on time of the day the activities happen. - Point to the first picture and model the task with one pupil, using the question in the first bubble and the phrase under the picture for the answer: + T: Where does a doctor work? - Write the question and the answer on the board. Then ask Ps to repeat a few times. - Ask pupils to practice in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the picture cues. Monitor the activity and offer help, if necessary. - Select some pairs of Ps to demonstrate the task in front of the class. 4. Let’s talk. - Tell Ps that they are going to revise what they have learnt in Lesson 1 and Lesson 2, using What does your father do? And Where does he/she work? - Ask Ps to work in pairs: one asks the questions and the other gives the answers, using the facts about themselves. Then they swap roles. - Select some pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class.. - Listen and repeat sentence by sentence. - Listen and repeat in groups. - Work in pairs to role play the dialogue. - Demonstrate in front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Answer: + in a factory. + in a field.. - Listen to T’s instruction. - Look at the bubbles. - Look at the first picture and answer the question. P: A doctor works in a hospital. - Listen and repeat. - Work in pairs: one asks the question and the other gives the answer. - The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Listen to T’s instruction.. - Work in pairs to do the task.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(130) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 5. Reinforcement. - Some pairs act out the dialogue. - Get Ps to play the “pass the ball” game. - Explain how the game is played. The teacher play a recording of music and the Ss pass a ball when the music stop who has the ball on his/her hand, she /he has to say aloud - Play the game. the job in each pictureon the boad. Using : A doctor works in a hospital. Coming on the music for Ss play the game. - Review the language of the lesson. Period 80 Unit 12: What does your father do? Lesson 2 (4, 5, 6) I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to: + listen to recognize the jobs and working places. + correctly identifyand write the jobs and working places. + play the game pelmanism ! II. Languages focus (review): 1. Vocabulary: 2. Sentence pattern: He’s/ She’s a doctor. He/ She works in a hospital.. III. Resources: - Student’s book, computer, recording, projectors, speakers.. IV. Procedure Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up. - Get Ps to look at the media, listen, sing the song My family 2. Listen and number. - Tell pupils that they are going to l listen to abuot the jobs, working places and number the pictures. - Focus their attention on the pictures and discuss with them what does he/she do? Where does he/she work? Then tell them to listen and number the pictures. - Play the recording through for pupils to listen. - Play the recording again for pupils to listen to and number. Ask them to focus on the job king places. - Get pupils to swap their answers before you check as a class. - Play the recording one more time for. Students’ activities - Look at the media, sing The song. - Listen to T’s instruction. - Observe.. - Listen to the recording. - Listen to the recording and do the task.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(131) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 pupils to listen and check. - Work in pairs to check their answers. Key: a2 b4 c1 d3 3. Look and write. - Listen and check. - Tell Ps that they are going to look and write about their jobs and working places. - Ask Ps to look at the pictures and identify the jobs and working places they are going - Listen to the teacher. to write about. - Give Ps time to do the task independently. - Look at the pictures and identify. Go around offering help, if necessary. - Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. If there is enough time, - Do the task independently. call some pairs of pupils to act out the dialogues. - Work in pairs to compare their Key: 1. She is a doctor. answers. She works in a hospital. 2. He is a farmer. He works in a field. - Ask Ss to write a paragraph about their parents’ jobs. - Invite some Ss to write on the board. - Check and correct mistakes. - Write a paragraph about 4. Let’s play. their parents’ jobs. - Tell Ps that they are going to play the - Write on the board. game pelmanism! - Correct mistakes. - Divide the class into small groups. - Ask groups to play the game in pairs, - Listen to T’s instruction. take turns to open the flashcards to find out the same ones. - Form group. - Decide the winner who has more the - Play the game in pairs, take turns to same pictures. open the flashcards to find out the 5. Reinforcement. same ones. - Get Ps to look at the media, sing a song - Congratulate the winner. and do the actions. Period 81 Unit 12: What does your father do? Lesson 3 (1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students are able to: + pronounce the sounds of the letters ie in the words: field, piece, respectively. ea in the words: teacher, reading. + listen to the recording and circle the words. + sing the chant “Jobs and places of work” II. Language focus: Phonics: ie – field, piece. ea - teacher, reading. III. Resources: Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(132) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Student’s book, computer, recording, projectors, speakers.. IV. Procedures: Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up. - Play 2 videos about how to pronounce the sounds of ie and ea. - Guide Ss to distinguish these sounds. - Invite Ss to pronounce the sounds of ie and ea. 2. Listen and repeat. - Tell Ss that they are going to practice saying the sounds of the letters ie in the words field, piece, and ea in the words: teacher, reading. respectively. - Put the phonics letters ie and ea on the board and say them a few times. - Pronounce the sound of the letters “ie” “ea” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times (the whole class, in groups, individuals). - Pronounce the sound of the word “field” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times (the whole class, in groups, individuals). - Play the recording the sentence “My grandpa works in a field ” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times (the whole class, in groups, individuals). - Pronounce the sound of the word “piece” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times (the whole class, in groups, individuals). - Play the recording the sentence “I want a piece of chocolate.” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times.( the whole class, in groups, individuals) - Pronounce the sound of the word “teacher” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times (the whole class, in groups, individuals). - Play the recording the sentence “My mother is a teacher.” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times (the whole class, in groups, individuals). - Pronounce the sound of the word “reading”. Students’ activities - Watch the video carefully. - Practice pronouncing these two sounds. - Pronounce the sounds.. - Listen to T.. - Look at the board. - Listen and repeat. - Observe. - Listen and repeat. - Listen and repeat.. - Observe. - Listen and repeat. - Listen and repeat.. - Observe. - Listen and repeat. - Listen and repeat.. - Observe.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(133) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times (the whole class, in groups, individuals). - Play the recording the sentence “She’s reading a book now” a few times. Then ask Ss to repeat a few times (the whole class, in groups, individuals). Do choral repetition of the words and sentences until Ss feel confident. - Call on some Ps to say the words and sentences. 3. Listen and circle. Then say sentences with the circled words. - Tell Ps that they are going to listen to the recording and circle the words. - Give the class a few second to read the words in silence and guess the words to circle - Play the recording all the way through for Ss to listen. - Play the second time and ask Ss to do the task. - Have Ss check their answers in pairs, then ask some Ss to report their answer to the class. - Gives the best answers. Key: 1. b, 2. b - Ask Ss say sentences with the circled words: - Call some Ss to say aloud in front of the class. - Check and correct mistakes. 4. Let’s chant. - Tell Ss that they are going to sing the chant “Jobs and places of work” - Give a few seconds for Ss to sing the chant. Check comprehension. - Say each line of the chant, then have Ss repeat it a few times. Give a demonstration of chanting and clapping the rhythm. - Divide class into two groups: one group chants the questions and the other chants the answers. - Get groups of Ss to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Go around and offer help, if necessary.. - Listen and repeat. - Listen and repeat.. - Say the words and sentences.. - Listen to T. - Read the words in silence and guess the words to fill in the blanks. - Listen the recording. - Listen the recording and do the task. - Check their answers in pairs - Some Ps report their answer to the class. - Say sentences with the circled words: Ex: - I have a piece of cake. - I am reading a book. - Look at the chant and listen to the teacher. - Sing the chant. - Repeat each line of the chant. - Work in 2 groups. - Sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. - Chant and do the actions.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(134) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Call two groups to the front of the class to chant and do the actions. The rest of the class - Sing the new chant. claps along to the rhythm. 5. Reinforcement. - Get Ps to work in pairs to sing the new chant by replacing some phrases: grandfather, grandmother, driver, cook, ........... - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the language. Period 82 Unit 12: What does your father do? Lesson 3 (4, 5, 6) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: + read the text about Phong’s report and complete the table + write a short paragraph about their family members’ jobs and working places. + do a project about their parents’ jobs. II. Languages focus 1. Vocabulary: 2. Sentence pattern (review): What does your father do? - He’s a doctor. Where does he work? - He works in a hospital. III. Resources Student’s book, recording, computer, projector, speakers. IV. Procedure: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Warm up - Get sts to sing the chant “Jobs and places of - Sing the chant and do the actions. work”on page 16. 2. Read and complete. - Tell Ps that they are going to read the text about Phong’s report and complete the table. - Give them to read the text. - Look at the text - Tell them that they are going to have to complete the table with the job and place of work of Phong’s family members. - Read the sentences. - Have them read the text to find information they - Listen to T. need to complete the task. - Give Ss time to do the task independently. - Look at the task and discuss how to Monitor the activity and offer help when do this one. necessary. - Do the task independently. - Let Ps trade their answers in pairs for the correction. - Call on some pupils to report their answers. - Trade their answers in pairs for the - Comment and provide key: correction. Key: - The rest of the class observe and give comments. Job Place of work Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(135) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Father. teacher. Mother nurse Brother worker. Le Hong Phong Primary School Thanh nhan Hospitall Car factory. 3. Write about the jobs of your family members and where they work. - Tell Ss that they are going to write a short paragraph about the jobs of their family members and where they work, using the words cues. - Have them work in pairs to discuss what words they are going to write. Remind them to write the verbs in the third person singular (e.g. is , works). - Give Ps time to do the task independently. - Go through the task with the whole class and let them do this individually. - Let Ps trade their answers in pairs for the correction. - Ask two Ps to write down their answers on the board and check. - Check and correct mistakes. - Call on some Ss to read aloud the completed sentences. 4. Project. - Tell ss that they are going to do a project about their parents’ jobs. - Give each P a card. Have Ps copy the table from the book onto their cards. - Give them time to ask their friends and write the information about their parents’ jobs. - Call some Ps to the front of the class and tell to the class about their friends’ jobs. Key: P’s own answers. 5. Reinforcement - Have Ps work in pairs to do the task “Help people to find their working place”. 1. doctor a. bus company 2. farmer b. factory 3. teacher. c. school 4. worker d. hospitall 5.bus driver e. home 6. housewife f. office 7. clerk g. field. - Observe.. - Listen to the T. - Work in pairs to discuss what words they are going to write. - Do the task independently. - Go through the task with the T. - Trade their answers in pairs for the correction. - Check and correct mistakes - Read aloud the completed sentences. - Listen carefully. - Copy the table from the book onto their cards. - Ask their friends and write the information about their parents’ jobs. - Report their answers. - Comment and correct mistakes - Work in pairs to do the task.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(136) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Check.. V. Evaluation. ......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... WEEK 22. Date of teaching: from / 2 to / 2 /2017 Period 83 Unit 13: wOULD you LIKE SOME MILK? Lesson 1: 1, 2 I. Objectives. - By the end of the lesson pupils will be able to: + Use the words and phrases related to the topic Food and Drink. + Asking and answering questions about favourite food and drink, using What’s your favourite food/drink? It’s ………. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(137) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 II. Language focus. 1. Vocabulary:food, drink, beef, pork, orange juice, water 2. Sentence pattern:What’s your favourite ………..? It’s ……….. III. Resource.. 1. Teacher’s: Student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, computer/cassette. 2. Student’s: Book and notebook. IV. Procedure. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Warm up. * Warm up. - Have Ss Sing the chant “Jobs and places - Ss Sing the chant “Jobs and places of of work” work” 2. New lesson. 2.1. Look, listen and repeat. * Look, listen and repeat. - Tell pupils that they are going to read a - Listen to the T story in which pupils ask and answer questions about food and drink, using What’s your favourite food/drink? It’s ……. - Have Ss look at picture and answer the - Ss look at picture and answer the questions “who are they? Where are they?, questions.( Tom and Mai are in the what are they saying?” .( Tom and Mai are canteen.) in the canteen. In picture a, Tom ask Mai about her favourite food, using What’s your favourite food?,and Mai answer It’sfish. In piture b, Mai asks about Tom’s favourite food, using How about you? In picture c and d, they continue to ask each other about their favourite drink.) - T plays the recording all the way through for pupils to listen, and point to the appropriate line in their books. - Listen carefully the recording and repeat - T plays the recording again for pupils to the dialogue. repeat the lines. - Divide the class into 2 groups. Ask the - Listen and repeat. groups to repeat Mai and Tom’s parts. Repeat the step a few times but this time - Ss play the role Mai and Tom. ask the groups to swap their parts. 2.2 Point and say. - T has Pupils look at Picture a, b, c, d, e. Tell them that they are going to practice *. Point and say asking and answering questions about their - Look at pictures a, b, c, d, e and identify favourite food and drink, using What’s your favourite food/drink? It’s ……. Help them to identify food and drink in the Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(138) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 pictures. - Tell pupils to look at the pictures and say the words: food, drink, beef, pork, orange juice, water. - T models with a Student the first picture - T asks Pupils to practise in pairs ask and answer the questions What’s your favourite food?It’s beef. Monitor the activity, check the pronunciation (stress, assimilation of sounds and intonation), and offer help when necessary. - T calls on some pairs to perform the task at the front of class. -T has the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. - Have Ss practice to ask and answer about their favourite food and drink. 3. Reinforcement. - Practise asking and answering question about their favourite food and drink, using What’s your favourite food/drink? It’s ………. 4. Home link. - T gives comments to the class. - Pupils look at the pictures and say the words: food, drink, beef, pork, orange juice, water. - Pupils practise in pairs ask and answer the questions What’s your favourite food? It’s beef. - Observe - Act in pair - The rest of class observes and gives comments - Whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus - Ss practice to ask and answer about their favourite food and drink * Reinforcement. - Practise in pairs.. * Homelink. - Listen and remember. Period 84 Unit 13: would you like some milk? Lesson 1: 3, 4, 5 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson pupils will be able to: + Asking and answering questions about favourite food and drink, using What’s your favourite food/drink? It’s ………. + Sing the songMyfavuotire food and drink. II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: (Review) 2. Sentence pattern:What’s your favourite ………..? It’s ……….. III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: Student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, computer/cassette. 2. Student’s: Book and notebook. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up. * Warm up. - Call a few pairs to the front of the class to - Practise in pair ask and answer the question What’s your favourite food/drink? Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(139) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 2. New lesson. 2.3. Listen and tick - Ask pupils to look at the picture. Tell them that they are going to listen 4 dialogues about some children’s favourite food and drink and tick the correct pictures. - Have Ss look at the pictures to identify the food and drink(1a. Chicken. 1b Fish 1c. Beef. 2a. Milk. 2b. Apple juice. 2c. Orange juice. 3a. Chicken and orange juice. 3b. Chicken and milk. 3c. Beef and water.) - Play the recording all the way through for pupils to listen as they read. - Play the recording again for pupils to listen to the recording and tick the correct pictures. - Play the recording once more for pupils to check their answers. - Ask pupils to exchange their answers with their partners before reporting them to the class. - Read out the answers to the class. Provide explanation(s) when necessary. Key: 1b 2c3a 2.4. Look and write. -Ask Pupils look at Pictures from 1 to 3 and ask them to identify food and drink in each picture. - Tell Ps that they are going to write the answers to the questions about favourite food and drink suggested in thepictures.Give Ps a few seconds to look at the pictures. Ask them to read the question next to each picture and write the answer. - Get Ps to do the task individually. Go around and offer help, if necessary. - Get Ps to swap and check their answers before writing the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down into their notebooks. - Call a few open pairs to read aloud the answers. Key: 1. It’s chicken 2. It’s orange juice. 3. It’s fish and water. 2.5. Let’s sing.. *. Listen and tick. - Look at the picture and listen.. - Look at the picture and identify. - Listento the recording. - Listen to the recording and tick the correct pictures - Listen and check. - Work in pairs to exchange their answers - Write down the notebooks. * Look and write. - Pupils look at Pictures from 1 to 3 and ask them to identify food and drink in each picture. - Listen to the T - Read - Do the task individually. - Ss trade their answers - Ss read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. - The whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(140) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Have Ss sing the song “My favourite food and drink” - Play the recording all the way through for pupils to listen while they are reading the song. - Play the recording again for pupils to Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. Repeat the step, but this time have pupils swap their parts.. * Let’s sing - Listen to the song. - Listen again - One group perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Practise singing and doing the actions in groups.. - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at - Sing the song and clap the rhythm the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce - Class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. their pronunciation. 3. Reinforcement. - T makes a few questions to check - Listen and answer the question pupils’comprehension. 4. Home link. - Ask Ss to sing the song at home Period 85 Unit 13: wOULD you LIKE SOME MILK? Lesson 2: 1, 2, 3 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson pupils will be able to: + Òffer some food and drink accept/decline someone’s offer, using Would you like some….? Yes, please. No, thanks. II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: bread, rice, vegetables, lemonlade. 2. Sentence pattern: Would you like some…………..? Yes, please./ No, thanks.. III. Resources: Student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, TV, computer Teacher’s activities Students’activities. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(141) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 1. Warm up - Have Ss sing the song “ My favourite food and drink ” 2. New lesson. 2.1. Look, listen and repeat. - Tell Ps that they are going to read a story in which the characters offer food and drink, using Would you like some…? And accept/decline offer, using Yes, please./ No, thanks. - Give them a few seconds to look at the pictures and ask them some question such as Who are they?/ Where are they?/ What are they saying?( Linda, Mai and Mai’s mother are in kitchen. In picture a, MrsLan offers Linda some noodles, saying Would you like some noodles? And Linda accepts her offer saying Yes, please. In picture b and c, MrsLan offers Linda milk and then orange juice, and Linda declines her offers, using No, thanks. In picture d,MrsLan offers Linda lemonade and Linda accepts the offer by saying Yes, please.) - Play the recording more than once, if necessary, for Ps listen and repeat. Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking. - Play the recording again for Ps to listen and repeat. If time allows, ask a few pairs to role play the conversation. 2.2. Point and say. - Tell Ps that they are going to practiseoffering someone food/drinks and accepting or decline someone’s offer. - Ask them look at the picture and the words under them. Listen and repeat the words. “bread, rice, vegetables and lemonade.” - Have pupils repeat each word a few times. - Point to picture a and have pupils repeat the words bread. Then tell one pupil to make an offer saying Would you like some bread?, and another accepting or declining the offer saying Yes, please./ No, thanks. - Repeat the some procedure with the rest of the pictures.. - Ss sing the song * Look, listen and repeat. - Ss are going to read a story in which the characters offer food and drink. - Look at the picture and answer these questions. -Listen and repeat.. - Listen and repeat then role play. * Point and say. - Listen to the T - Look at the picture. Listen and repeat the words. “bread, rice, vegetables and lemonade.” - Repeat each word a few times. - Point to picture a and have pupils repeat the words bread. Then make an offer. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(142) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Do choral and individual repetition and then ask pupils to practice asking and answering the questions in pairs. - Ask Sspractiseoffering someone food/ drinks and accepting or declining someone’s offer. - Call some pairs to act out the dialogues in front of the class. Correct pronunciation, if necessary. 2.3. Let’s talk. -Tell Ps that they are going to revise what they have learnt in lesson 1 and 2. - Get them to work in pairs, ask and answer two questions. Remind them to answer with facts about themselves. What’s your favourite food/ drink? And Would you like some….? - Call a few pairs to act out their conversation. - Encourage Ps to observe and give comments in English. 3. Reinforcement.. - Work in pairs - Practise - Some pairs to act out the dialogues in front of the class. * Let’s talk. - Listen to the T - Work in pairs.. - Act out their conversation. - Ask and answer about food/ drink.. 4. Home link. - Get Ps to practice asking and answering * Reinforcement. about food and drink. Period 86 Unit 13: wOULD you LIKE SOME MILK? Lesson 2: 4, 5, 6 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson pupils will be able to: + Òffer some food and drink accept/decline someone’s offer, using Would you like some….? Yes, please. No, thanks. + Listen and number the picture. II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary:(review) 2. Sentence pattern:What’s your favourite food/drink? Would you like some……….?. III. Resources: Student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, TV, computer Teacher’s activities Student’s activities. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(143) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 1. Warm up. - Call some pairs of pupils the front of the class to perform how to offer someonefood/drink and how to accept or decline an offer, using Would you like….? 2. New lesson 2.4. Listen and number - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to four dialogues about people’s food anddrink and number them in the order they hear. - Give Ss a few seconds to look at the pictures. Ask them to say the food and drink aloud. - Play the recording more than once, if necessary. Ask pupils to listen and number the pictures. Tell them that they should focus on the jobs of the people. - Get pupils to swap their answers before you check as a class. Monitor the activity and often help, if necessary. Key:a. 3 b.1 c.2 d.4 2.5. Look and write. - Tell pupils that they are going to complete the menu. Then ask them to look at the pictures and write the words for the food and drink. - Set a time limit for pupils to do the task independently. Go around offering help, if necessary. - Check the answers as a class and call one or two pupils to read aloud the complete text. Key: 1. Milk 2.lemonade 3. Water 4. Fish 4. Rice 5. bread 2.6. Let’s play. - Tell pupils that they are going to play the game food and drink - Write Food and Drink on two side of the board. Then write fish under Food and milk under Drink. - Call two groups to the front of the class. They should take turns to write the name of a food or drink on the board. The group that runs out ideas, or puts a food or drink under. * Warm up. - Work in pairs. * Listen and number - Pupils are going to listen to four dialogues about people’s food and drink and number them in the order they hear. - Look at the pictures and say the food and drink aloud. - Pupils to listen and number the pictures. - Listen and check the answers - Work in pairs. * Look and write. - Listen to the teacher.. - Do the task. - Check the answer and read aloud. * Let’s play. - Listen to the teacher. - Observe - Play the game in groups. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(144) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 the wrong category is out of the game. Then another group comes out and continues. The group which stays until the end of the game is the winner. 3. Reinforcement. - Have Ps to work in pairs to talk about favourite food and drink, using What’s your favourite food/drink? It’s ………. 4. Home link. - Ask Ps to write about name of the food/drink at home.. * Reinforcement. - Work in pairs. * Home link. - Listen and remember.. V. Evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………. WEEK 23. Date of teaching: from 20/ 2 to 25 / 2 /2017 Period 87 Unit 13: wOULD you LIKE SOME MILK? Lesson 3: 1, 2, 3 I. Objectives.- At the end of the lesson pupils will be able to pronounce the sounds of the letters f and sh in the word beef, leaf, fish, dish respectively. II. Language focus : 1.Phonics: f, sh beef, leaf, fish, dish Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(145) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 2.Vocabulary: Review 3. Sentence pattern: Review III. Resources :Student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, computer. IV. Procedures : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Warm up. * Warm up. - Have Ss play game “ Pass the secret” - Divide class into groups of six to play using the name of food and drink. game “ Pass the secret” 2. Newlesson 2-1. Listen and repeat: * Listen and repeat. - Tell pupils that they are going to practise - Listen to the teacher’s instruction saying the sound of the letters f and sh in the word beef, leaf, fish, dish respectively. - Put the letters f and shon the board. Play - Copy the letters f and sh, pay the the recording and ask pupils to repeat a attention on the sounds of the letters and few times. repeat. - Put the words beef, leaf, fish, dish and - Listen and repeat four sentences on the board, play the recording and ask pupils to repeat a few times, paying attention to the target sounds - Listen and repeat in chorus then - Do choral and individual repetition of the individual sounds words and sentences until pupils feel confident - Stand up and say aloud - Get some Ps to say the sentences in front of the class. Check as a class and correct * Listen and write. Then say aloud.the pronunciation, if necessary - Listen to the teacher. 3. Listen and tick. Then say aloud. - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to - Look at the sentences and guess the the four sentences and tick the correct words to fill the gaps in groups. words. - Ask them to look at the sentences and - Listen and tick the correct words. guess the words to fill the gaps in groups. - Play the recording so they can listen and tick the words. Remind Ps to focus on the - Swap and check words with the letters f and shwhile - Read aloud listening. - Get Ps to swap and check their answers. - Listen and check their answers - Ask Ps to read aloud the sentences - Key : 1.a 2.b 3. a 4. b * Let’s chant. - Play the recording to check if necessary. - Listen to the teacher. 4. Let’s chant. - Tell pupils that they are going to say the chant Would you like some fish? follow the - Read the chant procedure in teaching the unit components in introduction - Listen to the recording and repeat line Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(146) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Have them read the chant and check by line. comprehension. - Do choral and individual repetition - Play the recording line by line for Ps until they get familiarized with the listen and repeat. pronunciation of the chant - Play the recording all the way through for - Chant and TPR Ps listen and repeat. - Work in four groups: chant and do - Show Ss how to chant and do the action actions. - Divide the class into four groups to chant. Two groups chant the question the others chant the answers. Ask groups to sit - Perform in front of the class opposite of each other. Go around and offer help if necessary *Reinforcement. - Call two groups chant and do the action - Sing along to reinforce pronunciation. in front of the class. The rest of the class - Underline the words contain sounds f claps along the rhythm and sh 4. Reinforcement. - Play the recording again - Underline the words contain sounds f and sh Period 88 Unit 13: wOULD you LIKE SOME MILK? Lesson 3: 4, 5, 6 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson pupils will be able to + Read the text and complete the table. + Write about their favourite food and drink. II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: Review 2. Sentence pattern: Review. III. Resources: Student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, radio, computer IV. Procedure:. Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up. - Revising the previous lesson. Get the class to sing the chant Would you like some fish? and do action. 2. New lesson 2-4. Read and complete - Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and complete the table. - Have Ps read the text and discuss the information that they have to fill in the gaps in groups. - Ask Ps to do the task individually. Go round offering help, if necessary. - Have Ps trade their answers in pairs. Students’activities * Warm up. - Sing the chant Would you like some fish? and do action. * Read and complete - Listen to the teacher. - Read the text and discuss the information that they have to fill in the gaps in groups. - Do the task individually. - Trade their answers in pairs - Give the answers and the rest listen and. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(147) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Have Ps give the answers.. comment. Answer: Favourite food Favourite drink Beef orange juice Chicken lemonade * Let’s write - Listen to the teacher.. 2-5. Let’s write - Tell pupils that they are going to write about their favourite food and drink. - Have them work in groups of four to - Work in groups of four to discuss what discuss what they are going to write in the they are going to write in the blanks. blanks. - Do the task individually. - Have pupils to do the task individually. Go around and offering help if necessary. - Swap their writings before checking as - Swap their writings before checking as a a class. class. - Show some writings, read aloud and - Show some Ps’ writings, ask them to read check. aloud and check. * Project. 2-6. Project. - Listen to the teacher. - Tell pupils that they are going to do interview their classmates about their favourite food and drink and then report to - Pupils copy the table from the book the class. onto their cards. - Give each pupil a card. Have pupils copy the table from the book onto their cards. - Interview their classmates and fill the - Give them time to interview their gaps in the table. classmates and fill the gaps in the table. - Some pupils tell the class about the - Call some pupils to tell the class about the result of their interview to the class. result of their interview to the class. - Key: Pupils’own answers * Reinforcement. 3. Reinforcement. - Tell about their favourite food and - Ask Ps to tell about their favourite food drink to the class. and drink to the class. Period 89 Unit 14: WHAT DOES HE LOOK LIKE? Lesson 1: 1, 2 I. Objectives:By the end of the lesson pupils will be able to - Use the words and phrases to relate the topic Physical appearance. - Ask and answer questions someone’s physical appearance. II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: tall, short, slim, old, young. 2. Sentence pattern: What does he/ she look like? She’s/ He’s…….. III: Resources: Student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, family’s photo, radio, computer. IV: Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up. * Warm up. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(148) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Play the video. Ask Ss to watch and identify the adjectives describing people’s appearance. - Introduce the new topic 2. New lesson. 2.1. Look, listen and repeat. *Use the pictures and the actions to teach the new words of someone’s physical appearance: tall, short, slim, old, young - Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 24 and look at picture. - Ask Ss to answer the questions “who are they? Where are they? What is Lan doing? Who is on the computer? What does he do? Is he tall? - T plays the recording all the way through for pupils to listen and point to the appropriate line in their books. - Open one by one sentence for Ss to listen and repeat. - Divide the class into 2 groups. Ask the groups to repeat Phong’s part and Linda’s part. - Ask SS to work in pairs, practice speaking the conversation. - Invite some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue. 2.2. Point and say. - T has Pupils look at Picture a, b, c, d, e. Tell them that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about someone’s physical appearance. - T models with a Student the first picture - T asks Pupils to practise in pairs ask and answer the questions What does he/ she look like? She’s/ He’s ……..Monitor the activity, check the pronunciation (stress, assimilation of sounds and intonation), and offer help when necessary. -T calls on some pairs to perform the task in front of the class. 3. Reinforcement. - Ask Ss to work in groups, asking and answering questions about their friends’. - Watch the video and identify the adjectives describing people’s appearance. - Pay attention to the T’s directions. * Look, listen and repeat. - Look at the pictures and the actions to get the meaning of the new words of someone’s physical appearance: tall, short, slim, old, young - Pupils turn their books to page 24 and look at picture. - Ss answer the questions “who are they? Where are they? What is Lan doing? Who is on the computer? What does he do? Is he tall? - Listen to the conversation carefully. - Listen to one by one sentence and repeat. - Work in groups: listen and repeat. - Work in pairs and practice speaking. - Demonstrate the dialogue. * Point and say. - Look at pictures a, b, c, d, e and say the words of someone’s physical appearance. - Make a model with the teacher. - Pupils in pairs use the pictures in their book to ask and answer the questions What does he/ she look like? She’s/ He’s …….. - Act in pairs. The rest of class observes and gives comments * Reinforcement. - Do the task in groups, asking and answering questions about their friends’ family member’s job, where they work and their physical appearance.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(149) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 family member’s job, where they work and their physical appearance. Period 90 Unit 14 What DOES HE LOOK LIKE? Lesson 1: 3, 4, 5 I. Objectives:- By the end of the lesson pupils will be able to + Listen to three dialogues about people’s appearance and tick the correct pictures. + Look at the pictures and write about someone’s appearance. II. Language focus:1. Vocabulary: Review. 2. Sentence pattern: Review. III: Resources book, pictures, family’s photo, radio, computer. IV: Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up. - Have Ss play game “slap the board” using Ss play game “ slap the board” the picture about the people appearance. - Use photos of some people to ask and - Look at the photos, ask and answer answer about appearance. about appearance. 2. New lesson. 2.3. Listen and tick. * Listen and tick. - Ask pupils to look at the picture Tell them - Listen to the teacher. that they are going to listen 3 dialogues about people’s appearance and tick the correct pictures. - Work in groups to identify the - Ask Ss to work in groups to identify the appearance of the people in the pictures. appearance of the people in the pictures. - Listen to the recording and tick the - Play the recording twice for pupils to listen correct answers to the recording and tick the correct answers. - Ask pupils to exchange their answers with - Work in pairs to exchange their their partners before reporting them to the answers class. - Read out the answers to the class. Provide - Write down the notebooks. explanation(s) when necessary. - Listen and check. - Play the recording once more for pupils to check their answers. Key: 1- c , 2- c.,3- a * Look and write. 2.4. Look and write. - Listen to the teacher. - Tell Ps that they are going to complete the answers about someone’s appearance, using - Pupils look at Pictures from 1 to 4 and the picture cues. ask them to identify the physical - Ask Pupils look at Pictures from 1 to 4 and appearance of the person/ people in ask them to identify the physical appearance each picture. of the person/ people in each picture. - Work in pairs to elicit the answers - Give Ps a few seconds to work in pairs to filling the gaps. elicit the answers filling the gaps. - Do the task individually. - Get Ps to do the task individually. Go around offering help, if necessary. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(150) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Get Ps to swap and check their answers before writing the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down into their notebooks. - Call a few open pairs to act out the dialogues in front of the class. Key: 1. He’s tall/slim. 2. They are old. 3. She’s short/ young. 4. They’re young/ tall. 2.5. Let’s play. - Tell Ss that they are going to play game “ Find someone who……..”using the words related to people’s physical appearance. - Divide class into groups of five. - Say to Ss Find someone who……..The group which is the quickest to point a classmate who fits that description and says the sentence correctly gets a point. The group that gets most points will win the game. 3. Reinforcement. - T makes a few questions to check pupils’comprehension.. groups for correction then write the re answers on the board. - Some open pairs act out the dialogues in front of the class.. * Let’s play. - Listen to the teacher. - Divide class into groups of five. - Take part in the game.. - The group that gets most points will win the game. * Reinforcement. - Listen and answer the question. V. Evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………. WEEK 24. Date of teaching: from 27/ 2 to 4 /3 /2017 Period 91 Unit 14 What DOES HE LOOK LIKE? Lesson 2: 1, 2, 3 I. Objectives:- By the end of the lesson pupils will be able to + Make a comparisons, using Who is + (comparative)? ...is + (comparative). II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: taller, bigger, older (elder)….. 2. Sentence pattern: Who is taller? My brother is taller than my father. III: Resources:Ss and T’s book, pictures, family’s photo, radio, computer. IV: Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Warm up * Warm up. - Play the game Spelling Bee: spell to make - Divide into two groups and play the Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(151) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 the words of someone’s physical appearance. - Ask Ps to ask and answer the questions about the physical of their classmates. 2. New lesson. 2.1. Look, listen and repeat. * Use pictures to teach the comparative words: taller, bigger, shorter, smaller, younger and older (elder). - Have pupils look at pictures in part 1 and answer the questions: “Who are they? What is in Nam’s hands? Is he tall? What does he look like?”. - Tell them that they are going to look at the dialogue in their student’s book, listen to the recording and repeat the dialogue. - T plays the recording all the way through for pupils to listen, and point to the appropriate line in their books. - T plays the recording again for pupils to repeat line by line. - Divide the class into 2 groups. Ask the groups to repeat Nam’s part and Tony’s part. 2.2. Point and say. - T has Pupils look at Picture a, b, c. Tell them that they are going to practice asking and answering questions to compare people’s appearance. - T models with a Student the first picture. - T asks Pupils to practise in pairs asking and answering questions to compare people’s appearance, using the prompts in the bubbles and words under the pictures. Monitor the activity, check the pronunciation (stress, assimilation of sounds and intonation), and offer help when necessary. - T calls on some pairs to perform the task in front of the class. 2.3. Let’s talk. - Ask them to work in groups to ask answer questions about their classmates’ appearance and make comparisons, using What does he/ she look like? Who’s…? Go around offering help and correcting pronunciation, if. game. - Ask and answer the questions about the physical of their classmates. * Look, listen and repeat. - Look at the pictures to get the meaning of the comparative words. - Pupils look at picture and answer the questions: “Who are they? What is in Nam’s hands? Is he tall? What does he look like?”. - Listen to the teacher. - Listen carefully the recording and repeat the dialogue, point to the appropriate line in their books. - Listen and repeat line by line. - Listen and repeat in two groups. * Point and say. - Look at pictures a, b, c, d and identify the job and the place. - Make a model with the teacher. - Practise in pairs asking and answering questions to compare people’s appearance, using the prompts in the bubbles and words under the pictures.. - Some pairs to perform the task in front of the class. * Let’s talk. - Work in groups to ask answer questions about their classmates’ appearance and make comparisons, using What does he/ she look like? Who’s…?. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(152) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 necessary. - Some groups role-play in front of the - Select some groups to role-play in front of class the class. * Reinforcement. 3. Reinforcement. - Show the photo of their family then tell - Ask pupils to show the photo of their to the class about the appearance and family then tell to the class about the make comparisons of their family appearance and make comparisons of their members. family members. Period 92 Unit 14 What DOES HE LOOK LIKE? Lesson 2: 4, 5, 6 I. Objectives:- By the end of the lesson pupils will be able to + Listen to Nam’s description of his family and circle the correct answers. + Look at the pictures and write the comparisons of people’s appearance. II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: Review 2. Sentence pattern: Review III: Resources: Student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, clock, TV, computer. IV: Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Warm up. * Warm up. - Ask pupils to show the photo of their - Show the photo of their family then family then tell to the class about the tell to the class about the appearance appearance and make comparisons of their and make comparisons of their family family members. members. 2. New lesson. 2.4. Listen and number. * Listen and number. - Tell the class that they are going to listen - Listen to the teacher. to Nam’s description of his family and circle the correct answers. - Have Ss look at four incomplete sentences - Ss look at four incomplete sentences and guess the answers for each sentence. and guess the answers for each - Play the recording for pupils listen and sentence. circle the answers (Twice) - Ask pupils to work in pairs to check the - Ss listen and circle the answers. answers. - Have Ss give the answers - Work in pairs to check the answers. - Have Ss listen and check their answers. - Ss give the answers. - Key: 1- a 2- a 3- b 4- b - Ss listen and check their answers. 2.5. Look and write. - Tell the pupils that they are going to look * Look and write. at the pictures and write the answers to the - Listen to the teacher to get the aim of questions to make comparisons of people’s the section. appearance. - Have Ss work in pairs to look at four - Work in pairs to look at four pictures pictures and identify the difference in and identify the difference in appearance between the family members in appearance between the family each picture to find out the information to members in each picture to find out the Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(153) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 fill in the gaps. information to fill in the gaps. - Get Ss to do their task in 5 minutes. - Ss do their task in 5 minutes. - Get Ss to swap their answers before - Swap their answers then check in front checking as a class. of the class by reading aloud some - Call some pairs to act out the dialogues. writings. 2.6. Let’s sing. - Some pairs to act out the dialogues. - Have Ss sing the song “What do they look * Let’s sing. like?” - Listen to the teacher. - Play the recording all the way through for pupils to listen while they are reading the - Listen to the song. song. - Play the recording again for pupils to Have - Listen and sing the song. the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation - Group work. Pupils practise singing and - Practise singing and doing the actions doing the actions in groups. Monitor the in groups. activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - One group performs the song in front - Call on one group to perform the song in of the class. The rest of the class sing front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. the song and clap the rhythm. * Reinforcement. 3. Reinforcement. - Class sing the song again to reinforce - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. their pronunciation. - Listen and answer. - T makes a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension. Period 93 Unit 14 What DOES HE LOOK LIKE? Lesson 3: 1, 2, 3 I. Objectives.- At the end of the lesson pupils will be able to pronounce the sounds of the letters th in the word this, that, thin, thick respectively. II. Language focus: 1.Phonics: th this, that, thin, thick 2.Vocabulary: and Sentence pattern: III. Resources : Student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, computer. IV. Procedures : Teacher’s activities S’s activities 1.Warm up. * Warm up. - Ask Ps to sing the song “What do they - Sing the song “What do they look like?” look like?” 2. Newlesson * Listen and repeat. 2. Listen and repeat: - Listen to the teacher’s instruction - Tell pupils that they are going to practise saying the soud of the letters th in the word this, that, thin, thick - Copy and pay the attention on the respectively. sounds of the letters then repeat. - Put the letters th on the board. Play the Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(154) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 recording and ask pupils to repeat a few times. - Put the words: this, that, thin, thick and the four sentences on the board, play the recording and ask pupil s to repeat a few times. - Do choral and individual repetition of the sounds words and sentences until pupils feel confident - Get some Ps to say the letters, the words and the sentences in front of the class. Check as a class and correct the pronunciation, if necessary 3. Listen and tick. Then say aloud. - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the four sentences and tick the correct words. - Ask them to look at the sentences and guess the words to fill the gaps - Play the recording so they can listen and tick the words. Remind Ps to focus on the sound of the letters th while listening. - Get Ps to swap and check their answers. - Ask Ps to read aloud the sentences - Play the recording again for Ps to check if necessary. Key : 1- a 2- b 3- a 4- b 4. Let’s chant. Tell pupils that they are going to say the chant This is my family follow the procedure in teaching the unit components in introduction - Have them read the chant and check comprehension. - Play the recording more than one, if necessary for pupils listen and repeat. - Show Ps how to chant and do the action. - Divide the class into group of four and call two group of Ps to give the demonstration. Ask the groups to sit opposite of each other. Go around and offer help if necessary. - Call two groups to the front of the class chant and do the action. The rest of the class claps along the rhythm. - Copy and pay the attention on the sounds of the words, the sentences then repeat. - Listen and repeat in chorus then individual - Stand up and say aloud * Listen and tick. Then say aloud.- - Listen to the teacher. - Look and do the task - Listen and tick the correct words. - Check their answers in pairs. - Read aloud - Listen and check. * Let’s chant. - Listen to the teacher. - Read the chant - Do choral and individual repetition until they get familiarized with the pronunciation of the chant - Chant and TPR - Work in GR of four to practise chanting and doing the action. - Perform in front of the class *Revision. - Sing along to reinforce pronunciation. - Underline the words contain sounds th.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(155) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 5. Revision. - Play the recording again. - Underline the words contain sounds th Period 94 Unit 14 What DOES HE LOOK LIKE? Lesson 3: 4, 5, 6 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson pupils will be able to :+ Read and complete the sentences. + Write a short paragraph. II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Sentence pattern:(review) III. Resources: Student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, TV, computer IV. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up. * Warm up. - Revising the previous lesson. Get two - Two groups of five to go to the front of the groups of five pupils to go to the front of the class to say the chant This is my family. class to say the chant This is my family. Ask the rest of the class to listen and clap their hands. 2. New lesson * Read and write. 2.4. Read and write. - Listen to the T - Tell the class that they are going to read an email about a girl’s family and write the answers to the questions. - Read the email and focus on the - Tell Ss to read the question first. Then ask information needed to answer the questions. them to read the email and focus on the information needed to answer the questions. - Work in pair - Get pupils to work in pairs to discuss the possible answers to the questions. - Do the task - Give Ss time to do the task independently. Go around and offer help, if necessary. - Get pupils to swap and check their answers - Swap and check answer in pairs before checking as a class. - Get Ss to give their answers. - Some Ss give their answers, others listen Key: 1. He is a teacher. 2. He is tall and slim. and comment. 3. She is beautiful. 4. Her brother is younger. 5. Marie is shorter. 2.5. Write. * Write. - Tell pupils that they are going to write an - Listen to the teacher. email to their friends to describe their family, using the given words in the frame. - Look at the given words and guess what - Have them look at the given words and are they going to write. decide what they are going to write. - Ask them to write about their father’s and mother’s appearance. - Do the task independently. - Give pupils time to do the task independently. - Swap their answers before checking as a Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(156) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Get pupils to swap their answers before checking as a class. Key: Pupils’ own answers 2.6. Project. - Ask Ss to bring a photo of their family and describe their family members to the class. - Ask Ss to think about what to say about their family members (e.g. name, age, job, hobbies, appearance) - Have Ss work in pairs to discuss what they are going to talk about. - Get one pupil to do a demonstration in front of the class before starting the activity. - Call some pupils to the front of the class to tell the class about their family members. 4. Reinforcement. - T makes a few questions to check pupils’comprehension.. class * Project. - Bring a photo of their family and describe - Say about their family members - Work in pairs - Do a demonstration in front of the class - Some pupils are in front of the class to tell the class about their family members. * Reinforcement... V. Evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………. ... WEEK 25. Date of teaching: from 6/3 to 11 /3 /2017 Period 95 UNIT 15: WHEN’S CHILDREN’S DAY? Lesson 1: 1, 2 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, pupils will be able to: - Use the words and phrases to relate the topic Festival. - Ask and answer questions about popular festivals. II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: New Year, Children’s Day, Teacher’ Day, Christmas, party 2. Sentence pattern: When is Children’s Day?- It’s on … III: Resources: Student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, radio, computer … IV: Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up. - Get some Ss to go to the front of the class to * Warm up. talk about their family members. - Go to the board and talk about their 2. New lesson. family members. 2. 1. Look, listen and repeat. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(157) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 *Use the pictures about some festivals to teach * Look, listen and repeat. the new words: New Year, Children’s Day, - Look at the pictures to get the meaning Teacher’ Day, Christmas, party … of the new words about the festivals. - Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to - Pupils turn their books and look at page 30 and look at picture. picture. - Ask Ss to answer the questions “who are they? Where are they? What are they talking - Answer the questions. about? What is the date? What’s it about? - Play the recording all the way through for pupils to listen and point to the appropriate line - Listen to the conversation carefully. in their books. - Open one by one sentence for Ss to listen and - Listen to one by one sentence and repeat. repeat. - Divide the class into 2 groups. Ask the groups - Work in groups: listen and repeat. to repeat Tom’s part and Mai’s part. - Ask SS to work in pairs, practice speaking the conversation. - Work in pairs and practice speaking. - Invite some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue. - Demonstrate the dialogue. 2. 2. Point and say. - Ask Pupils to look at Picture a, b, c, d, e. Tell them that they are going to practice asking and * Point and say. answering questions about the popular - Look at pictures a, b, c, d, e and say festivals. the words about the popular festivals. - Model with a Student the first picture - Ask Pupils to practise in pairs ask and answer - Make a model with the teacher. the questions: When’s New Year?- It’s on …. - Monitor the activity, check the pronunciation - Pupils in pairs use the pictures in their (stress, assimilation of sounds and intonation), book to ask and answer the questions. and offer help when necessary. - Act in pairs. The rest of class observes - Call on some pairs to perform the task in front and gives comments of the class. * Reinforcement. 3. Revision. - Do the task in groups, asking and - Ask Ss to work in groups, asking and answering questions about holidays and answering questions about holidays and festivals in Viet Nam and other festivals in Viet Nam and other countries. 4. countries. Home link. - Listen and remember. - Learn by heart the new words Period 96 UNIT 15: WHEN’S CHILDREN’S DAY? Lesson 1: 3, 4, 5 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, pupils will be able to: + Listen to three dialogues about the festivals and tick the correct pictures. + Look at the pictures and write about the date of the festivals II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Sentence pattern: III. Resources: Student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, radio, computer … Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(158) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 IV. Procedure: Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up. - Have Ss play game “slap the board” using the picture about the festivals. - Use some pictures to ask Ss ask and answer . 2. New lesson. 2. 3. Listen and tick. - Ask pupils to look at the picture Tell them that they are going to listen 3 dialogues about the festivals and tick the correct pictures. - Ask Ss to work in groups to identify the names and the dates of the festivals in the pictures. - Play the recording twice for pupils to listen to the recording and tick the correct answers. - Ask pupils to exchange their answers with their partners before reporting them to the class. - Read out the answers to the class. Provide explanation(s) when necessary. - Play the recording once more for pupils to check their answers. Key: 1- c , 2- c.,3- a 2. 4. Look and write. - Tell Ps that they are going to complete the answers about some dates of the festivals, using the picture cues. - Ask Pupils look at Pictures from 1 to 3 and ask them to identify the date of the festivals in each picture. - Give Ps a few seconds to work in pairs to elicit the answers filling the gaps. - Get Ps to do the task individually. Go around offering help, if necessary. - Get Ps to swap and check their answers before writing the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down into their notebooks. - Call a few open pairs to act out the dialogues in front of the class. Key: 1. It’s on the twenty- fifth of December. 2. It’s on the twentieth of November. 3. It’s on the first of June. 2. 5. Let’s sing. - Have Ss sing the song “Happy New Year”. Students’ activities - Play game “slap the board” in groups. - Work in pairs. * Listen and tick. - Listen to the teacher. - Work in groups.. - Listen to the recording and tick the correct answers - Work in pairs to exchange their answers - Write down the notebooks. - Listen and check. * Look and write. - Listen to the teacher. - Pupils look at Pictures from 1 to 4 and ask them to identify the physical appearance of the person/ people in each picture. - Work in pairs to elicit the answers filling the gaps. - Do the task individually. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction then write the re answers on the board. - Some open pairs act out the dialogues in front of the class. * Let’s sing.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(159) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Play the recording all the way through for - Listen to the teacher. pupils to listen while they are reading the song. - Play the recording again for pupils to Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to - Listen carefully. reinforce their pronunciation - Listen to the song. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. Repeat the step, and have - Listen and sing the song. pupils swap their parts. - Group work. Pupils practise singing and do actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help - Practise singing and doing the actions them when necessary. Correct pronunciation in groups. Ss’ errors. - One group performs the song in front - Call on one group to perform the song at the of the class. The rest of the class sing front of the class. The rest of the class sing the the song and clap the rhythm. song and clap the rhythm. - Work in groups. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. - The whole class. 3. Revision.- Make a few questions to check * Reinforcement. pupils’comprehension. - Listen and answer the question 4. Home link.- Learn by heart the song. - Listen and remember. Period 97 UNIT 15: WHEN’S CHILDREN’S DAY? Lesson 2: 1, 2, 3 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson pupils will be able to + Ask and answer questions about what people do at a festival, using What do you do at/ on + ( festival)? II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: make banh chung, decorate the house, firework displays, get lucky money….. 2. Sentence pattern: What do you do at Tet? – I make banh chung. III: Resources: Student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, radio, computer … IV: Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up - Call some Ss to sing the song Happy New Year in front of the class. * Warm up. - Ask Ps to ask and answer the questions - Work in groups. about the festivals. - Work in pairs. 2. New lesson. 2.1. Look, listen and repeat. * Look, listen and repeat. * Use pictures to teach some new words - Look at the pictures to identify some about activities at/ on a festival: make banh activities. chung, decorate the house, firework displays, get lucky money. - Have pupils look at pictures in part 1 and answer the questions: “Who are they? Where - Look at picture and answer the questions. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(160) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 are they? What are they doing? Picture a: Mai is decorating the house; P b: Mai is wearing - Listen to the teacher. new clothes; …”. - Tell them that they are going to look at the dialogue in their student’s book, listen to the - Listen carefully the recording and repeat recording and repeat the dialogue. the dialogue, point to the appropriate line - Play the recording all the way through for in their books. pupils to listen, and point to the appropriate line in their books. - Listen and repeat line by line. - Play the recording again for pupils to repeat line by line. - Listen and repeat in two groups. - Divide the class into 2 groups. Ask the groups to repeat Linda’s part and Mai’s part. 2. 2. Point and say. * Point and say. - Have Pupils look at Picture a, b, c. Tell - Look at pictures a, b, c, d and identify them that they are going to practice asking the activities. and answering questions about some activities on Tet. - Model with a Student the first picture. - Make a model with the teacher. - Ask Pupils to practise in pairs asking and answering questions about some activities on - Practise in pairs asking and answering Tet, using the prompts in the bubbles and questions about some activities on Tet. , words under the pictures. Monitor the using the prompts in the bubbles and activity, check the pronunciation (stress, words under the pictures. assimilation of sounds and intonation), and offer help when necessary. - Some pairs to perform the task in front of - Call on some pairs to perform the task in the class. front of the class. 2. 3. Let’s talk. * Let’s talk. - Ask them to work in groups to ask answer - Work in groups to ask answer questions questions about some activities on/ at a about some activities on/ at a festival? festival, using What do you do at/ on +(a festival)? I ……? - Some groups role-play in front of the - Go around offering help and correcting class. pronunciation, if necessary. - Select some groups to role-play in front of the class. 3. Revision. - Ask pupils to ask and answer questions - Work in pairs. about some activities on/ at a festival. 4. Home link. - Learn by heart the new words - Listen and remember. Period 98 UNIT 15: WHEN’S CHILDREN’S DAY? Lesson 2: 4, 5, 6 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, pupils will be able to: Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(161) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 + Listen to three dialogues and circle the correct answers. + Look at the pictures and write the sentences about what the characters do at Tet. II. Language focus:1. Vocabulary: Review 2. Sentence pattern: Review III. Resources: Student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, TV, computer … IV. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up. * Warm up. - Ask pupils to play the game Slap the board, using some picture about activities on/ at - Work in groups. some festivals. - Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about activities on/ at …… - Work in pairs. 2. New lesson. 2. 4. Listen and circle. - Tell the class that they are going to listen to * Listen and circle. three dialogues between Linda and Phong. - Listen to the teacher. Then circle the correct answers. - Have Ss look at four incomplete sentences - Look at four incomplete sentences and and guess the answers for each sentence. guess the answers for each sentence. - Play the recording for pupils listen and circle the answers (Twice) - Listen and circle the answers. - Ask pupils to work in pairs to check the answers. - Work in pairs to check the answers. - Have Ss give the answers - Give the answers. - Have Ss listen and check their answers. - Listen and check their answers. - Key: 1- a 2- b 3- b 4- a 2. 5. Look and write. * Look and write. - Tell the pupils that they are going to look at - Listen to the teacher to get the aim of the the pictures and write the answers to the section. questions about what the characters do at Tet, - Work in pairs to look at four pictures and using the picture cues. identify the missing information in each - Have Ss work in pairs to look at four picture to find out the information to fill in pictures and identify the missing information the gaps. in each picture to find out the information to - Do their task in 5 minutes. fill in the gaps. - Swap their answers then check in front of - Get Ss to do their task in 5 minutes. the class by reading aloud some writings. - Get Ss to swap their answers before - Some pairs to act out the dialogues. checking as a class. - Call some pairs to act out the dialogues. 2. 6. Let’s play. - Tell Ss that they are going to play game - Listen to the teacher. “Physical line- up…….” using the phrases related to the festivals. - Divide class into groups of five. Write sentences about different festivals on large Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(162) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 pieces of paper. Then cut each into two halves and put all the pieces into a box. The number of pieces in the box should be the same as the number of pupils in the groups. - Work in groups. - Ask the students to each draw a piece of paper from the box. Each pupil should find the person with the other half of their sentence and together read the sentence aloud. Continue the game with another group of pupils. 3. Revision.- Make a few questions to check - Listen and answer. pupils’ comprehension. 4. Home link. - Prepare new lesson. - Listen and remember.. V. Evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………. WEEK 26. Date of teaching: from 13/3 to 18 /3 /2017 Period 99 UNIT 15: WHEN’S CHILDREN’S DAY? Lesson 3: 1, 2, 3 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, pupils will be able to: pronounce the sounds of the letters cl in the word clothes, close and fl in flower, floor respectively. II. Language focus: 1.Phonics: cl clothes close fl flower floor 2.Vocabulary: 3. Sentence pattern: III. Resources : Student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, computer … IV. Procedures : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Warm up. - Ask Ps to play the game Physical lineup in groups. - Work in groups. 2. New lesson. 2. 1. Listen and repeat: - Tell pupils that they are going to practise * Listen and repeat. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(163) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 saying the sound of the letters cl in the word clothes, close and fl in flower, floor respectively. - Put the letters th on the board. Play the recording and ask pupils to repeat a few times. - Put the words: clothes, close, flower, floor and the four sentences on the board. - Play the recording and ask pupils to repeat a few times. - Do choral and individual repetition of the sounds words and sentences until pupils feel confident - Get some Ps to say the letters, the words and the sentences in front of the class. Check as a class and correct the pronunciation, if necessary 2. 2. Listen and write. Then say aloud. - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the four sentences and write the correct words. - Ask them to look at the sentences and guess the words to fill the gaps - Play the recording so they can listen and tick the words. Remind Ps to focus on the sound of the letters cl and fl while listening. - Get Ps to swap and check their answers. - Ask Ps to read aloud the sentences - Play the recording again for Ps to check if necessary. Key : 1- flower 2- Close 3- clothes 4floor. 2. 3. Let’s chant. Tell pupils that they are going to say the chant What do you do at Tet follow the procedure in teaching the unit components in introduction - Have them read the chant and check comprehension. - Play the recording more than one, if necessary for pupils listen and repeat. - Show Ps how to chant and do the action. - Divide the class into group of four and call two group of Ps to give the. - Listen to the teacher’s instruction - Copy and pay the attention on the sounds of the letters then repeat. - Copy and pay the attention on the sounds of the words, the sentences then repeat.. - Listen and repeat in chorus then individual - Stand up and say aloud * Listen and write. Then say aloud.- - Listen to the teacher. - Look and do the task - Listen and write the correct words. - Check their answers in pairs. - Read aloud - Listen and check.. * Let’s chant. - Listen to the teacher. - Read the chant - Do choral and individual repetition until they get familiarized with the pronunciation of the chant.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(164) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 demonstration. Ask the groups to sit opposite of each other. Go around and offer help if necessary. - Call two groups to the front of the class chant and do the action. The rest of the class claps along the rhythm 3. Revision. - Play the recording again. - Underline the words contain sounds fl and cl. 4. Home link. - Learn by heart the chant.. Period 100. - Chant and TPR - Work in groups of four to practise chanting and doing the action. - Perform in front of the class - Sing along to reinforce pronunciation. - Underline the words contain sounds fl and cl. - Listen and remember.. UNIT 15: WHEN’S CHILDREN’S DAY? Lesson 3: 4, 5, 6. I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, pupils will be able to: + Read and complete the sentences. + Write a short paragraph. II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: 2. Sentence pattern:(review) III. Resources: - Student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, TV, computer … IV. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Warm up. - Revising the previous lesson. Get two groups of five pupils to go to the front of * Warm up. the class to say the chant What do you do at - Two groups of five to go to the front Tet?. Ask the rest of the class to listen and of the class to say the chant. clap their hands. 2. New lesson. 2. 4. Read and write. - Tell the class that they are going to read * Read and write. the text about Tet and complete the - Listen to the teacher. sentences. - Get Ss to read the question first. Then ask them to read the email and focus on the - Read the email and focus on the information needed to complete the information needed to answer the sentences. questions. - Get pupils to work in pairs to discuss the Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(165) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 possible information to complete the sentences. - Give Ss time to do the task independently. Go around and offer help, if necessary. - Get pupils to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. - Get Ss to give their answers. Key: 1. Tet. 2. flowers. 3. their house, banh chung. 4. the firework displays. 5. their grandparents, teachers, friends 2. 5. Write about your Tet. - Tell pupils that they are going to write a short paragraph about Tet. They may use the information from activity 4. - Have them look at the given words and decide what they are going to write. - Ask them to discuss what they do at Tet in groups or pairs. - Give pupils time to do the task independently. - Get pupils to swap their answers before checking as a class. Key: Pupils’ own answers 2. 6. Project. - Tell pupils that they are going to make greeting cards for Tet and write wishes to their friends. Explain the task and check understanding. - Give each pupil a small card and some colour pencil. - Ask them to draw a card for Tet. After decorating the cards, they should copy the text from the Pupil’s Book and fill in the information. - Have Ss work in pairs to discuss what they are going to talk about.. - Work in pairs. - Do the task. - Swap and check answer in pairs - Some Ss give their answers, others listen and comment.. * Write. - Listen to the teacher. - Look at the given words and guess what are they going to write.. - Do the task independently. - Swap their answers before checking as a class * Project. - Bring a photo of their family and describe - Say about their family members. - Work in pairs.. - Do a demonstration in front of the. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(166) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Get one pupil to do a demonstration in front of the class before starting the activity. - Call some pupils to the front of the class to tell the class and read aloud what their partners have written. 3. Revision. - Make a few questions to check pupils’comprehension. 4. Home link. - T gives comments to the class.. class - Some pupils are in front of the class to tell the class about their family members. - Listen to the teacher.. Period 101- 102 REVIEW I. Objectives:. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Perform their abilities in listening, speaking and writing related to the topics from units 11-15, using the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns they have learnt. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening and writing skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Revisions. - Vocabulary: Revisions. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit11 to Ask ps to practice in pairs unit 15 1. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c, d and e on page 36 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the Give the identification characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and number the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with Listen and tick the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 2. Read and complete Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(167) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the dialogue in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. thirty 2. family 3. drinking 4. orange juice 5. seven 3. Read and match - Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 37. Tell pupils that they are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the sentences to the sentences. - Pupils read the sentences individually and do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for correction. - Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the sentences. - Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: 1.e 2. c 3. d 4.b 5. a 4. Look and write Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3 and4 on Page 37. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters in the pictures to the pupils. Ask them to ask and answer. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task in front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. Work individually Listen and tick. Work individually. Work in pairs.

(168) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Write about your fatheror mother. Pair works. - Ask ss to look at the text. Guide ss to do the task: they have to write about their father or mother based on guidence. - Call some ss read their answer. - Check and give a comment. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson. V. Evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………………. .. WEEK 27. Date of teaching: from 20/3 to 25 /3 /2017 Period 103- 104 Test. PART I. LISTENING Task 1. Listen and tick (). There is one example.. Example: A.. 1. A.. B.. B.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(169) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017. 2. A.. B.. 3. A.. B.. 4. A.. B.. 5. A. B. Task 2. Listen and tick () or cross (X). There are two examples.. Examples:. A.. B.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(170) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 1.. 3.. 2.. 4.. 5.. Task 3. Listen and draw lines. There is one example (0).. A.      . B. CB. PART II. READING AND WRITING Task 1. Look and write. There is one example.. Example: siwmgmni → s w i m m i n g. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. D B. E. F.

(171) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017. 1. llageiv →_______. 2. igconok →_______. 4. napitign samsk →________ _____. 3. cmisu →_____. 5. chbae →_____. Task 2. Read and complete. There is one example (0). A. No, I don't. B. It's Thursday D. I like singing English songs. 0.. A: What day is it today? B:. 1.. C. I have English, Maths and Art. E. I have it on Tuesday and Friday.. B. .. A: What subjects do you have on Thursday? B: __________.. 2.. A: Do you like Maths? B: __________.. 3.. A: What's your favourite subject? B: __________.. 4.. A: When do you have Music? B: __________.. 5.. A: What do you like doing in Music lessons? B: __________.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. F. I like Music..

(172) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Task 3. Read this. Select a word from the box to fill each gap. There is one example. (0) Hello, I’m Mimi from Mayan Primary School. It’s (1) ________ today. I’m in class now. We have Art and (2) _______ today. We are surfing the (3) ______ for our IT project. Yesterday was Sunday. I was not at school. I had a (4) _________ party with a lot of classmates. We had lots of fun. We had a big birthday cake. We watched videos, listened to music and (5)______.. Hello. danced. birthday. IT. Internet. Monday. Period 105 SHORT STORY. I. Objectives:. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 11 - 15. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening, writing and reading skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Revisions. - Vocabulary: Revisions. - Phonic: Revisions II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit 11 to Ask ps to practice in unit 15 pairs 1. Read and listen to the story. Then fill the gaps. - Read the sentences given and read the story about Cat Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(173) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 and Mouse 3 - Give the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Ss read and find out the suitable sentences to fill in the blanks and explain how to do the exercise. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and check their answers - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen. Check their guess. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the story - Play the recording again pupils listen to the story and check Ss’ answers. Read the sentences. Give the identification Work in pairs. Listen and answer T’s questions. 2. Number the sentences -Ask students to read the story in the book and read the sentences given to find out the mistake and correct the false sentences. Work individually to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. 3. Work in pairs. Complete the conversation with information about you Have Ps work individually. Read the story again and Work in pairs order the letters to make the meaningful words. Have pupils trade their answers for correction. - Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments. .- Have the whole class read each word in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 4. Find the words in the story to complete Work in group the sentences - Pairs work. Have pupils turn their books to page 39. Tell Pair work pupils that they are going to read the dialogue between Miu and Mimi and find out the suitable words to complete the meaningful dialogue. - Pupils do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Have pupils trade their answers for correction. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(174) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Call on some pairs to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the sentences. - Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Read and do exercise in 4.Consolidation pairs. Summary the lesson Period 106 Unit 16: Let’s go to the bookshop. Lesson 1 (1 - 2) I. Objectives:- By the end of this lesson, pupils will be able to: + Identify the words about public places. + Make and respond to suggestions to go somewhere. II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: bookshop, bakery, bread, pharmacy, medicine, supermarket, food, sweet shop, chocolate 2. Sentence patterns: Let’s go to the………… I want to…………. III. Resources -Student’s book, computer, projector, speakers, recordings. IV. Procedures: Teacher’s activities 1. Warm-up. - Sing the song. If you want to go….. - Ask Ss to listen, sing along and then sing in groups of 4. - Introduce the new topic 2. Checking the old lesson (in the warm up.) 3. New lesson. 3.1. Look, listen and repeat. -Tell pupils that they are going to find out about how to making and responding to suggestions to go somewhere. -Ask them to look at four pictures to identify the context in which the language is used. -Ask some questions such as: +Who are they? +Where are they? +What are they talking about? - Ask SS to describe one by one picture and predict what will happen in the listening. - Open the whole tape for Ss to listen.. Students’ activities - Listen to the song. - Sing along and sing in groups. - Pay attention to the T’s directions.. -Listen and talk what they think. -Look at four pictures and say. -Look at the pictures and answer.. - Describe one by one picture and predict what will happen in the listening.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(175) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Open one by one sentence for Ss to listen and repeat. - Ask SS to work in pairs, practice speaking the conversation. - Invite some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue. - Listen and correct the mistakes (if any). - Divide the class into 4 groups. - Ask all groups to do a role play by using the puppets and the dialogue. - T teaches the sentence pattern: Let’s go to the bookshop. I want some books. => Gread ideal. - Use the images and sounds related to the words in the activity 2 (Point and say, page 40) to introduce the new patterns (public places and the corresponding products) to SS. - Ask Ss to listen, identify the meaning of words and repeat the sounds. - Teach the vocabularies: +bakery/ buy some bread + pharmacy/ buy some medicine + supermarket/ buy some food + sweet shop/ buy some chocolate - Invite some SS to read aloud the words. 3.2. Point and say. - Ask Ss to open their book on page 40, work in pairs, point the pictures, practice making and responding to suggestions to go somewhere. -Point to the first picture and model the task with one pupil, using the question and the answer in the bubbles and the phrase under the picture. Ex: a) T: Let’s go to the bakery. I want some bread. P: Great idea. -Ask pupils to say the question and the answer chorally and individually. -Ask pupils to practice in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the phrases under the pictures. -Monitor the activity and offer help, if necessary. -Select some pairs to demonstrate the task in. - Listen to the conversation carefully. - Listen to one by one sentence and repeat. - Work in pairs and practice speaking. - Demonstrate the dialogue. - Correct the mistakes (if any). - Form group. - Do role play with the puppets. - Write down. - Concentrate on T’s direction.. - Listen, identify the meaning of words and repeat the sounds.. - Read aloud the words. - Open the book, work in pairs, point the pictures, practice making and responding to suggestions to go somewhere. -Listen to the teacher. -Look at the first picture and listen to the teacher.. -And then do the same with the rest of the pictures.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(176) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 front of the class. -Check as a class. 4. Reinforcement. - Get pupils to work in pairs to talk someone want to go somewhere and why 5. Home link. Learn by heart the vocabularies about public places by using the sentence pattern: Let’s go to the ……. I want some …….. => Gread ideal.. -Practice in pairs. -Some pairs practice in front of the class. -Listen. -Work in pairs. -Remember.. V. Evaluation: ……………………………………………………………………………………... WEEK 28. Date of teaching: from 27/3 to 1 /4 /2017. Period 107: Unit 16: Let’s go to the bookshop. Lesson 1 (3, 4, 5). I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to: - Listen to the recording and tick the correct pictures. - Write the answers for the questions about where someone do they want to go. II. Languages focus: 1. Vocabulary: (review) bookshop, bakery, bread, pharmacy, medicine, supermarket, food, sweet shop, chocolate 2. Sentence pattern: (review) Let’s go to the………… I want to…………. III. Resources: Student’s book, computer, recording, projectors, speakers. IV. Procedures: Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. 1. Warm up. - Spend a few minutes revising the previous - Some pairs of Ps act out the dialogues. lesson. Get some pairs of pupils to go to the - The rest of the class listen and give front of the class to making and responding comment. to suggestions to go somewhere. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(177) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 2. Checking the old lesson. (in the warm up) 3. New lesson. 3.1. Listen and tick. - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to four dialogues about where the characters want to go and tick the correct pictures. - Have Ps look at the pictures to identify the similarities and differences. Check understanding. - Play the recording more than once, if necessary, for pupils to listen to and tick the correct pictures. Tell them that they should focus on where each pupil was. - Get pupils to swap their answers before you check as a class. Key: 1. b 2. a 3. a 4.b Audio script: 1. Linda: Hi, Phong. Where are you going? Phong: I’m going to the bookshop. I want to buy some books. 2. Linda: oh! I want to buy some books, too. Phong: Ok, let’s go to the bookshop together. 3.Tony: Hi, Mai! Where are you going? Mai: I’m going to the supermarket. I want to buy something to drink. 4. Tony: I want something to drink, too. Mai: Ok, let’s go to the supermarket together. 3.2. Look and write. - Tell Ps that they are going to complete the sentences about where and why the characters want to go. - Give them a few seconds to look at the questions and the incomplete answers and to identify the missing words they need to complete the answers. Then focus Ps on the pictures to identify where the characters want to go. - Give Ps time to do the task independently. Go around and offer help, if necessary. - Get Ps to compare their answers with their. - Listen to the instruction.. - Look at the pictures and identify: 1a. sweetshop; 1b. bookshop pool;; 2a. They want some books; 2b.They want some pens 3a. supermarket; 3b. bakery; 4a. they want some vegetable; 4b. They want some water. - Listen to the recording to tick the correct pictures. - Exchange their answers with their partners.. - Listen to instruction. - Look at the questions and identify the missing words in the answers. - Look at the pictures to identify where the characters want to go. - Do the task individually.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(178) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 partners. - Call some Ps to read out their answers. If there is enough time, call some pairs to role-play the dialogues. Key: 1. to the bookshop/ buy some books 2. to the bakery/ buy some bread 3. to the sweetshop/ buy some chocolate. 4. to the pharmacy/ buy some medicine. 3.3. Let’s sing. - Tell Ps that they are going to sing the song Let’s go… - Review some public places: bookshop, cinema/ to see a film; zoo/ to see the animals. - Have Ps read each line of the lyrics aloud. - Do choral and individual repetition and check comprehension. - Play the recording all the way through. Ask Ps to do choral and individual repetition of the song line by line. - When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask two group of Ps to the front of the class to perform the song. - If have time, T can change some words in the song by other words they learnt such as . to the bakery/ buy some bread . to the sweetshop/ buy some chocolate. . to the pharmacy/ buy some medicine. Let’s go…… Let’s go to the bakery. I want to buy some bread. Let’s go to the sweetshop. I want to buy some chocolate. Let’s go to the pharmacy. I want to buy some medicine. 4. Reinforcement. - Have the class sing the song again and clap their hands to reinforce learning. 5. Home link. - Have Ps practise singing the song Let’s go…. at home.. Period 108. - Work in pairs to compare their answers. - Correct their answers.. - Listen to the teacher. - listen and write down on notebook. - Read each line of the lyrics. - Do choral and individual repetition - Listen to the recording. - Do choral and individual repetition of the song line by line. - The rest of the class sing together and clap hands.. - Sing the song and clap hands.. - Listen and remember.. Unit 16: Let’s go to the bookshop. Lesson 2 (1, 2, 3) Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(179) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to ask for and give reasons for going somewhere. II. Languages focus: 1. Vocabulary: zoo, see the animals, cinema, see the film, swimming pool. 2. Sentence pattern: Why do you want to go to the…… => Because……………. III. Resources: - Student’s book, computer, recording, projectors, speakers. IV. Procedures: Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. 1.Warm up. - Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson by calling some Ps to the front of the class to sing the song Let’s go…………. 2. Checking the old lesson. ( in the warm up) 3. New lesson. 3.1. Look, listen and repeat. - Tell Ps that they are going to listen to the dialogue of 3 pupils about where and why someone want to go - Ask Ps to look at the four pictures to identify the characters and the context in which the language is used. Ask them questions such as: Who are they? Where are they? What are they doing? - Play the recording more than once, if necessary, for pupils to listen and repeat the language. - Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking. - Teach the sentence pattern: Why do you want to go to the supermarket? Because I want to buy something to eat. 3.2. Point and say. - Tell pupils that they are going to ask and. - Some Ps go to the front of the class to sing the song. The rest of the class listen and clap hands.. - Listen to the teacher.. - Look at the pictures and identify the characters and the context. - Answer the questions.. - Repeat the text a few times.. - Do choral and individual repetion. - Write down on notebook.. - Listen to instruction.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(180) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 answer questions about why do the characters want to somewhere. - Have Ps look at the bubbles to understand how the language is used. - Ask Ps to look at the four pictures to identify what the Ps did yesterday. - Teach the phrases: +zoo/ see the animals; +cinema/ see a film; + swimming pool/ swim - Point to the first picture and model the task with one pupil, using the question in the first bubble and the phrase under the picture for the answer: + T: Why do you want to go to the zoo? + P: Because I want to see the animals. - Ask Ps to say the question and the answer chorally and individually. Repeat the same procedure with the rest of the pictures. - Ask pupils to practise in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the picture cues. Monitor the activity and offer help, if necessary. - Select some pairs of Ps to demonstrate the task in front of the class. 3.3. Let’s talk. - Tell Ps that they are going to revise what they have learnt in Lesson 1 and Lesson 2, using: + Let’s go to the…. + Why do you want to go to the…..? - Ask Ps to work in pairs: one asks the questions and the other gives the answers, using the facts about themselves. - Select some pairs to role-play in front of the class. 4. Reinforcement. - Ask some Ps to answer the questions in Activity 3.. - Look at the bubbles. - Look at the pictures and identify the reasons why the characters want to go somewhere - Copy down in to their notebooks and repeat the new words a few times. - Look at the first picture and listen to the model.. - Look at the question and the answer the board and read aloud.. - Work in pairs: one asks the question and the other gives the answer.. - The rest of the class listen and give comment. - Listen to instruction.. - Work in pairs to do the task.. - Some pairs act out the dialogue.. - Answer the T’s questions.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(181) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 5. Home link. - Have Ps practise making and responding to suggestions to go somewhere and asking - Listen and remember. for and giving reasons for going somewhere by using the sentence pattern: + Let’s go to the…. I want………. + Why do you want to go to the…..? => Because…………... Period 109. Unit 16: Let’s go to the bookshop. Lesson 2 (4, 5, 6). I. Objectives:By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to: - Listen to the recording and circle the correct pictures. - Look at the pictures, read the small dialogues and complete the sentences. II. Languages focus:1. Vocabulary: (review) 2. Sentence pattern: (review) III. Resources: - Student’s book, computer, recording, projectors, speakers.. IV. Procedures Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. 1. Warm up. - Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson by playing Charades. Ask Ps to mime where they want to go and give the reasons (Why) 2. Checking the old lesson. ( in the warm up) 3. New lesson. 3.1. Listen and circle. - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to four dialogues about where Mai, Tony, Phong and Tom want to go and want to buy. - Have Ps look at the sentences to read the cues in each sentence. - Play the recording more than once, if necessary, for pupils to listen to and circle the pictures. Ask them to focus on where Mai, Tony, Phong and Tom want to go and want to buy. - Get pupils to swap their answers before you check as a class. Key: 1. a 2. c 3. b 4.c Audio script: 1. Mai: Are you free now, Nam? Nam: Yes Mai: Let’s go to the zoo. I want to see the animals. Nam: Great idea! I want to see the animals, too. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. - Listen to the rule then play the game.. - Listen to instruction.. - Look at the sentences and identify them. - Listen to the recording and do the task. Listen to the teacher.. - Look at the pictures and identify. - Read the incomplete sentences..

(182) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 3.. Phong: Are you free now, Mai? Mai: Yes Phong: Let’s go to the bookshop Mai: Why do you want to go there? Phong: Because I want to buy some pens. Mai: Ok. Let’s go. 2. Tony: Are you free now, Linda? Linda: Yes, I am. Tony: Would you like to go to the cinema? Linda: Great idea! Let’s go 4. Hoa: Would you like to go to the swimming pool, Tom? Tom: Great idea! But let’s go to the supermarket first. Hoa: Why do you want to go there? Tom: Because I want to buy some bread. Hoa: Ok. I want something to eat, too. 3.2. Look and write. - Tell Ps that they are going to complete the answers to the questions about the character where want to go and want to do using the picture cues. - Ask Ps to look at the three pictures to identify where the characters want to go and want to do. Then ask Ps to read the incomplete answers and find appropriate words to fill the gaps. - Give Ps time to do the task independently. Go around offering help, if necessary. - Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. If there is enough time, call some pairs of pupils to act out the dialogues. Key: 1. he wants to buy some cakes and sweets. 2. she wants to buy somes books and pens. 3. they want to play football and badminton. 3.3. Let’s play. - Tell Ps that they are going to play the game WHERE and WHY - Ask Ps to play in 2 small groups. - Prepare two sets of cards for each group, group A with places they want to go, and group B with the questions to give the reasons. First, one player in group A shuffles the cards and lays them face down on the table. The other member in group B make question Why. That member will give the reason Why he/she wants to go there. If call which member Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. - Do the task individually. - Work in pairs to compare their answers.. - Listen to instruction. - Stand in groups.. - Play the game. - Do the task in silence..

(183) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 in each group, she/he doesn’t give the questions or the answer fast, that group lost, and the other group get 1 point ( or 1 star). Finally, if group get more - Listen and remember. points (or more stars) will won. - Let Ss play the game. 4. Reinforcement. - Have the whole class copy down the activities in each card in Acitivity 6 into their notebooks. 5. Home link. - Get Ps to prepare the next lesson. Period 110 Unit 16: Let’s go to the bookshop. Lesson 3: 1, 2, 3 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Use the words and phrases related to the topic The neighbourhood. - Understand what a syllable is and how to divide words into syllables. - Develop students' speaking and listening skills. II. Language focus: - Vocabulary and structures: Review III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: Laptop, recordings, projector, book, pictures….. 2. Students’:student’s book, notebook, workbook. IV. Procedures. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Warm up. - Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson. Get - The whole class play game to groups of pupils to the play the game Where and Why. Where and Why. 2. Activities. 2.1. Listen and repeat. 1. Listen and repeat. - Tell the class that they are going to practise saying - Students open book page 44. words with one, two, three, and four syllables( book, * book bookshop, bakery and supermarket). I want to buy a book. - First, explain to pupils what a syllable is. ( A syllable is * book/shop a word or part of a word that contains only one vowel Let’s go to the book/shop. sound. For pupils at this level, you may focus on the * ba/ke/ry vowel letters a, e, i, o, u and, for some words, also y.) The bread in this ba/ke/ry is Then put the four target words on the board, using delicious. vertical lines to divide the syllables. * su/per/mar/ket - Play the recording and ask pupils to repeat the words a Let’s go to the su/per/mar/ket. few times. To reinforce learning, ask them to clap at Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(184) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 each syllable as they say the words( e.g. book/shop: clap-clap). Then write the four sentences on the board. Play the recording and ask them to repeat the sentences, paying attention to the target words and syllables. - Put more words on the board, indicating the syllables with vertical lines. Ask pupils to repeat the words after you and clap at each syllable. You may use these words: to/ge/ther, good, go, want, part/ner, ci/ne/ma, a/ni/mal, film, be/cause, bread, gym, mo/ther, fa/ther. 2.2. Listen circle and write. Then say aloud. - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording, circle the correct options and write to answer to complete the sentences. - Give them a few seconds to read each of the sentences in silence and guess the words to fill the gaps. - Have pupils listen to the recording and circle the appropriate options. Play the recording more than once, if necessary. - Give them time to write the words independently. Have them swap their answers before checking as a class. Go around and offer help, if necessary. - Then ask pupils to say the sentences aloud. Key: 1a; 2b; 3a; 4b. Audio script: 1. Let’s go to the bookshop. 2. I want to buy a book. 3. There is a bakery near my home. 4. Her sister works in a supermarket. 2.3. Let’s chant. - Tell pupils that they are going to say the chant Why do you want to……..?Follow the procedure in Teaching the unit components in Introduction. - Have them read the chant and check comprehension. - Play the recording a few times for pupils to do choral and individual repetition. Show them how to chant and do the actions. - Put the class into two groups to practice chanting and doing actions. Each of the groups should sing one verse of the chant. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. - Ss listen. - Ss observe - Ss listen and write down.. 2. Listen circle and write. Then say aloud.. - Listen and circle the answer and then say the sentences aloud. - Look at the sentences.. - Practice reading the sentences with different intonations. - Read in chorus. - Listen to the teacher and do the task.. 3. Let’s chant. - Ss observe - Ss listen.. - One group repeats each line of the chant, the other clap the syllables. - Ss practise..

(185) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 3. Reinforcement. - The whole class repeat the - Tell the content of the lesson. chant - Practise with their friends ask and answer about Let’s go to the………….. - Students remember. Why do you want to ………….? Because I want some/ see………… 4. Homelink.- Prepare the next period. V. Evaluation: ………………………………………………………………………………………. WEEK 29. Date of teaching: from 3/4 to 8 /4 /2017 Period 111 Unit 16: Let’s go to the bookshop. Lesson 3:4,5,6. I. Objectives:By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Use words and phrases related to the topic The neighbourhood. - Ask for and give reasons for going somewhere, using + Why do you want to go to the…….? - Because I want some….. - Understand what a syllable is and how to divide words intosyllable - Improve listening, speaking, reading, writing skills. II. Language focus: * Vocabulary Supermarket, zoo, animal, cinema, film, bakery, buy, hungry, buy swimming pool. * Sentence pattern :+ Why do you want to go to the…….? - Because I want some….. III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: Laptop, recordings, projector, book, pictures….. 2. Students’:student’s book, notebook, workbook. IV. Procedures. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Warm up. - T says a word and asks ps How - Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson. many syllables are in the word? Say a word and ask ps How many syllables are in the word? Say a word again and ask them to the clap at each syllable to check their answers. You may use these words: book, bookshop, bakery, supermarket, Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(186) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 go, sister, work, ruler, because, hungry. 2. Activities. 2.4. Read and number. Tell the class that they are going to read the text and number the pictures. - Get pupils to look at the pictures and describe them. ( In Picture a, Phong and Mai are at the zoo. Phong is looking at the tiger. In Picture b, they are buying bread/ cakes at the bakery. In Picture c, they are at the pharmacy. In Pcture d, they are reading at the bookshop.) After thet, have them read the text and put the pictures in the correct order. Get them to work in pairs or small groups. - Give the m time to do the task independently. - Get pupils to swap their answers before checking as a class. If there enough time, let some pairs ask and answer questions about the text ( where do Phong and Mai want to go first? Why do they want to go there? Where do they want to go there? Key: a3 b4 c2 d1 Language note: First, then, after that and finally are used to show the order of actions. First is used to introduce the first action in a series. Then and after that are used to introduce the next action (s). Finally is used to introduce the last action 2.5.Look and write. Tell pupils that they are going to write sentences about where the characters want to go and why they want to go there. - Have them work in pairs or groups to disscuss what they are going to write. Ask them to look at the first picture and the given sentence as an example. Then they should identify the places in the pictures and think of the reasons for going there. - Give pupils time to do the task independently. - Get pupils to swap their answers before checking as a class. . If there is time, ask a few of them to write their. 4. Read and number. Open the book on page 45.. - Read aloud the passage. Vocabulary: First, then, after that and finally. - Read silently; number the pictures.. - Go to the board and complete the exercise.. 5.Look and write. - Work individually, look at the pictures and write the reasons. - Read aloud their writing. - Correct the mistakes (if any). - Go around the class and interview their friends to get the information where they want to go and why. - Report the results to the class. - Look at the pictures of products and write the places. - Correct the mistakes (if any). 6. Project. - Whole class. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(187) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 answers on the board. - Key: 2. Swimming pool, he wants to swim 3. pharmacy, she wants to buy some medicine. 4. cinema, they want to see a film 2.6. Project. - Ask Ss to go around the class and interview their friends to get the information where they want to go on Sunday and why they want to go there, using where do you want to go? Why do you want to go there? And complete the table - Get them to swap their cards in pairs. They should look at their parners’ cảds and tell the class about the interviewees’s Sunday plans. Confilrm with th interviewees whether what was said about them is correct. 3. Reinforcement. - Tell the content of the lesson. 4. Home link.- Prepare the next period.. - Pair work -Interview classmate to get information about their school and their class to complete the card . - Some pupils to the front of the class to report on work. - Ss listenSs remember.. Period 112. Unit 17: HOW MUCH IS THE T-SHIRT ? Lesson 1: 1, 2, 3 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Use the words and phrases related to the topic Prices of clothes. - Ask and answer questions about prices of clothes( singular) using How much is the….? It’s……… - Develop Ss' listenig and speaking skills. II. Language focus: * Vocabulary Scarf, blouse, jacket, skirt and jumper and twice, Tshirt, how much. * Sentence pattern + How much is the…….? - It’s….. III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: Laptop, recordings, projector, book, pictures….. 2. Students’:student’s book, notebook, workbook. IV. Procedures. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Warm up. - T teaches ps the names of some - Prepare ps for this unit by teaching them the names clothing iterms(e.g. T-shirt, of some clothing iterms(e.g. T-shirt, blouse, scarf and blouse, scarf and skirt.) skirt.) You may refer to what ps are wearing when teaching the vocabulary. 2. Activities. 2.1. Look, listen and repeat. 1. Look, listen and repeat. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(188) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Introduce the leson by saying Look at the pictures and guess what the story about. - Give a few minutes for pupils to look at the four pictures and suggest what the story may be about. Then have them read the story in silence. Ask a few questions to check their comprehension: where are Mai and Quan? What are they doing? What is Mai wearing? What is Quan wearing? How much is the Tshirt? ( In Pictures a and b, Mai and Quan are in the street and talking about Quan’s T- shirt. Mai is wearing a blouse and a skirt. Quan is wearing a T shirt. In Pictures c and d, Mai is in the supermarket. She wants to buy a red T- shirt. She asks for the price, using How much is it? The sales assistant says It’s 50,000 dong) - Play the recording a few times for pupils to listen and repeat. Do choral and individual, repetition, pointing to the characters speaking. - Play recording again so they can listen and repeat. - Teach them how to say numbers with five digits, using the language notes below Language notes: We say Excuse me when we want to get someone’s attention and ask for information, and say thanks/ thank you after we get the information. - We use thousand when we say numbers with four or five digits( 2,000 dong = two thousand dong, 35,000 dong = thirty- five thousand dong). 2.2. Point and say. - Tell the class that they are going to ask and answer questions about prices, using How much is the…….? It’s……… - Have them to look the pictures and the words and phrases under them. - Then ask them to look at the four pictures and ask them to say. - Teach vocabulary: scarf, blouse, jacket, skirt and jumper and twice, Tshirt, how much. - Wtire the prices of the five items in words on the board and get pupils to read the words twice. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. - Open the textbook. - Listen to the conversation carefully. - Listen to one by one sentence and repeat. - Work in pair and practice speaking. - Demonstrate the dialogue. - Correct the mistakes (if any). - Form group. - Do role play with the puppets. - Go to the board and do the puppets performance. - Congratulate the winner. - Concentrate on T’s direction. - Listen, identify the meaning of words and repeat the sounds. - Read aloud the words.. 2. Point and say. - Open the book, work in pairs, point the pictures, ask and answer the questions about prices (singular). - Go to the board and make the conversation. - Correct the mistakes (if any). - Form group..

(189) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 -Do an example with a pupil using Picture a. Then T:+ How much is the scarf ? have pupils work in pairs before inviting one or two - It’s 10,000 dong pairs to role- play the dialogue. - Look at the pictures carefully. - Point to the first picture and ask them. Then have them put the word and phrase into the blanks in the bubbles and say ‘ - Calculate the prices. - Sentence Patterns: - Answer the questions. T:+ How much is the…….? - It’s….. - Correct grammar mistakes (if - Ask ps to work in pairs and do the task. any). - Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. Work in pairs. Ask your partners the prices of the clothes above. - Tell pupils that they are going to work in pairs and ask and answer questions about the prices of the clothes above. - Set a time limit for the activity and circulate to monitor and offer hepl. - Invite one or two pairs to act out the exchanges. 3. Reinforcement.- Tell the content of the lesson. 4. Home link.- Prepare the next period. Period 113 Unit 17: HOW MUCH IS THE T-SHIRT ? Lesson 1:4,5,6 I. Objectives:By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Use the words and phrases related to the topic Prices of clothes. - Ask and answer questions about prices of clothes( singular) using How much is the….? It’s……… - Write about the price of their clothes. - Develop Ss' listenig and writing skills. II. Language focus: * Vocabulary Scarf, blouse, jacket, skirt and jumper and twice, Tshirt, how much. * Sentence pattern + How much is the…….? - It’s….. III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: Laptop, recordings, projector, book, pictures….. 2. Students’:student’s book, notebook, workbook. IV. Procedures. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Warm up. - Call three ps to the front of - Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson. Call the class to act out the story in 3 ps to the front of the class to act out the story in Activity 1. Then have the class Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(190) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Activity 1. Then have the class play Slap the board, using the names of the closing items and the prices in Activity 2. 2. Activities. 2.3. Listen and tick. - Introduce the activity by saying You are going to listen to three conversations and tick correct box under each picture. - Give a few seconds for pupils to look at the pictures and read the prices Ask them to say the prices aloud. - Play the recording three times once for pupils to listen all the way through, a second time for them to do the task and finally for them to check the answers. Ask them to focus on the price of each item. - Get pupils to swap their answers before you check as a class. Key :( a3 ; b1 ; c2) 2. 4. Look and write. - Tell the class that they are going to look at the clothes and write the price for each item. - Go through every picture with pupils and ask them to identify the names of the clothing items and their prices. Then have them look at the worked example and write the answers for the other pictures. Remind them to mention the colour of each item. - Set a time limit for them to fill the gaps. - Call some pupils to read aloud their sentences and check the answers as a class. Key: 2. Yellow jumper, forty thousand dong. 3. red jacket, sixty thousand dong. 4. green skirt, seventy thousand dong. 5. purple/ pink/ blouse, fifty thousand dong. 2. 5. Let’s play. - Introduce the activity and remind pupils how to play the game Pelmanism. - Divide the class into small groups. Give each group a set of cards( You may prepare one set of cards and then photocopy them). Each group should distribute the cards on the table, face down, a pupil turns over a pair of cards. - Ask groups to play the game in pairs, take turns to open the flashcards to find out the same ones. 3. Reinforcement.- Tell the content of the lesson. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. play Slap the board, using the names of the closing items and the prices in Activity 2. 3. Listen and tick. - Open the book. - Describe the pictures.. - Listen to the tape carefully and choose the correct answers.. - Complete the exercise. 4. Look and write. - Look at the pictures and write the sentence about the price for the clothes. - Go to the board and complete. - Correct the mistakes (if any). - Look at the pictures about the family, ask and answer the questions about the price of clothes that they are wearing. - Correct the wrong answers (if any). 5. Let’s play. - Form group. - Play the game in pairs, take turns to open the flashcards to find out the same ones. - Congratulate the winner.

(191) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 4. Home link.- Prepare the next period. Period 114 Unit 17: HOW MUCH IS THE T-SHIRT ? Lesson 2: 1, 2, 3 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Develop Ss' listenig and speaking skills. - Use the words and phrases related to the topic Prices of clothes. - Ask and answer questions about prices of clothes( plural) using How much are the….? They’re……… II. Language focus: * Vocabulary: Jeans, shoes, trousers and sandals. * Sentence pattern : + How much are the…….? - They’re…….. III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: Laptop, recordings, projector, book, pictures….. 2. Students’:student’s book, notebook, workbook. IV. Procedures. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Warm up. - Ps sing the song What’s your - Ask some pupils to go to the front of the class to sing phone number? the song What’s your phone number? The rest of the class sing along and clap hand. 2. Activities. 1. Look, listen and repeat. 2. 1. Listen and repeat. - Open the book page 48. - Introduce the story by saying Look at the pictures and find uot what Mai wants to buy in the supermarket. ( A pair of yellow trousers) - Guess. - Give pupils a few seconds to read the story and check - Listen and repeat. their comprehension by asking questions such as Where are Mai and Hoa? What does Mai wants to buy a pair of yellow trousers. ( Mai and Hoa are in the supermarket/ clothes shop. Mai wants to buy a pair of yellow trousers. She asks for the price of the trousers, using How much are these trousers? The sales assistant answers They’re 99,000 dong - Play the recording more than once. For pupils to listen - Do choral and individual and repeat the language. Do choral and individual repetition repetition, poiting to the characters speaking. - Correct the pronunciation. 2.Point and say. 2. 2. Point and say. - Open the book, work in pairs, - Tell the class that they are going to ask and answer point the pictures, ask and questions about prices, using How much are the…….? answer the question about Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(192) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 price. They’re……… - Have them to look the pictures and the words and - Go to the board and make the phrases under them. - Then ask them to look at the four pictures and ask them conversation. to say. - Correct the mistakes (if any). - Teach vocabulary: Jeans, shoes, trousers and sandals. - Wtire the prices of the five items in words on the board - Look at the pictures carefully and remember the clothes. and get pupils to read the words twice. -Do an example with a pupil using Picture a. Then have pupils work in pairs before inviting one or two pairs to role- play the dialogue. - Go to the board, play the - Point to the first picture and ask them. Then have them roles as the buyer and seller, ask and answer the questions put the word and phrase into the blanks in the bubbles about prices of the clothes as and say. required. - Sentence Patterns: T:+ How much are the…….? - Correct the mistakes (if any). - They’re…….. - Ask ps to work in pairs and do the task. - Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. Languege notes: - Trousers and jeans are always in the plural form. They can be used with or without a pair of( Trousers/ a pair of trousers) 3. Let’s talk. - Shoes and sandals can be used in the plural or singular - Work in pairs or in a small form, depending on the meaning. group, ask and answer the - When a pair of + ( noun) is the subject of a sentence, it questions. is folowed by singular verb. 2. 3. Let’s talk. - Go to the board and answer. - Introduce the activity and check comprehension. Then spend a few seconds revising the use of that and those -Some pairs to role – play in and the nouns that follow them ( that skirt, those skirts). front of the class. Draw pupils’ attention to the plural forms of the nouns and verbs in those sentences. - Practice in pairs - Get pupils to work in pairs to ask and answer questions about clothes. They may take turns to play the role of a customer and a sales assitant and point at other classmates’ clothes and ask and answer about the prices. 3. Reinforcement. - Tell the content of the lesson. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(193) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 4. Home link.- Prepare the next period.. V:Evaluation: .......................................………..………………………………………………………. WEEK 30. Date of teaching: from 10/4 to 15 /4 /2017 Period 115 Unit 17: HOW MUCH IS THE T-SHIRT ? Lesson 2: 4,5,6 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Develop Ss' listenig and speaking skills. - Use the words and phrases related to the topic Prices of clothes. - Ask and answer questions about prices of clothes( plural,singular) using How much is/are the….? It’s/they ’re……… II. Language focus: * Vocabulary: Jeans, shoes, trousers and sandals. * Sentence pattern : + How much is/are the…….? - It’s/ they’re…….. III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: Laptop, recordings, projector, book, pictures….. 2. Students’:student’s book, notebook, workbook. IV. Procedures. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Warm up. Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson. - Answer Ask one or two pairs to the front of the class to ask and answer questions about the prices of clothes. How much is the T- shirt? How much are your shoes? How much are these blue Jeans? 2. Activities. 2.4. Listen and write the prices. 4. Listen and write the Tell pupils that they are going to listen to four prices. dialouges about clothes and write the prices. - Open the book page 49. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(194) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Give a few seconds for them to look at the pictures and identify the clothing items(sandals,Jeans,shoes and trousers. - Play the recoding three times. Ask pupils to listen to recoding and write the prices. - When the listening activity is over, have four pupils tell the class the prices of the four clothing items(eg. Look at this pictures. The sandals are 90,000 dong) Key: a.90,000dong b.73,000 c.80,000 d.95,000dong 2. 5. Look and write. - Tell pupils that they are going to look at the pictures and write the name of each clothing items and its price. - Give them a few seconds to look at the pictures and read the text. - Set a time limit for task.Remind pupils to write the words for the prices. - Call some pupils to read aloud their sentences and check the answers as a class. Key: 2. Brown sandals, seventy- two thousand dong 3.The pair of blue jeans is eighty–eight thousand dong 4. The pair of black and write shoes is eighty thousand dong. - Look at pictures and identify the clothing items - Listen to the recoding. - Tell the prices of clothing.. 5. Look and write. - Look at the pictures and write the the name of each clothing items and its price. - Go to the board and complete. - Read aloud the sentences - Correct the mistakes (if any). - Look at the clothes of their classmates, ask and answer the questions about the price of clothes that they are wearing. - Correct the wrong answers (if any 6. Let’s sing.. 2.6. Let’s sing. - Tell the class that they are going to sing the song Buying clothes, following the procedure in Teaching - Listen to the teacher. the unit components in Introduction. - Have pupils read each line of the lyrics aloud. Check comprehension. - Play the recording all the way through. Ask Ps to do - Listen to the tape. choral and individual repetition of the song line by line. - When pupils are familiar with the tune, ask a group - Ps sings group. to go to the front of the class to sing the song and clap hands or do actions. - Have the class sing the song again and clap their Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(195) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 hands or do actions to reinforce learning. 3. Reinforcement. - Tell the content of the lesson. 4. Home link. - Prepare the next period. Period 116 Unit 17: HOW MUCH IS THE T-SHIRT ? Lesson 3: 1, 2, 3 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Use the words and phrases related to the topic Prices of clothes. - Pronounce two-syllable words with the stress on the first syllable:‘sandals, ‘ trousers,’jumper and ‘jacket. - Develop students' speaking and listening skills. II. Language focus: - Vocabulary and structures: Review III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: Laptop, recordings, projector, book, pictures….. 2. Students’:student’s book, notebook, workbook. IV. Procedures. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Warm up. - Spend a few minutes revising the previous - The whole class sing the song lesson by having the class sing the song Buying Buying clothes. clothes, one haft singing the questions and the other half sing the answer. 2. Activities. 2.1. Listen and repeat. 1. Listen and repeat. - Students open book page 44. - Tell the class that they are going to practise ‘ sandals saying words ‘sandals, ‘trousers,’jumper and ‘ I like these ‘sandals jacket. - First, explain to pupils what word stress is , in ‘trousers Vietnamese, if necessary.(word stress is the I don’t like those ‘trousers emphasis that you put on a syllable by saying it ’ jumper more loudly). Tell them that we use the stress How much is that ’jumper mark(‘) to indicate word stress. ‘ - Write ‘sandals, ‘trousers,’jumper and ‘jacket. jacket The ‘jacket is fifty-three thousand dong - Play the recording and ask pupils to repeat - Ss listen. them,paying attention to the target words and Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(196) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 stress. - Ss observe - Get some pupils to say the sentences, while the rest of the class claps at the stressed syllables of - Ss listen and write down. the target words. Correct the pronunciation,if necessary. 2.2. Listen at the sentences and the stress mark(‘).Then listen and say the sentences aloud. 2.2. Listen at the sentences and the stress mark(‘).Then listen - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the and say the sentences aloud. sentences,listen to the recoding and repeat the sentences. - Give them a few seconds to read each of the sentences in silence. - Look at the sentences. - Have pupils listen to the recording and repeat after. Ask them to pay attention to the underlined - Listen to the recoding and words and clap at the stressed syllables. repeat the sentences. - Invite a few pupils to read aloud the sentences, while the rest of the class clap at the stressed syllable. Correct the pronunciation, if necessary. - Practice reading the sentences. 2.3. Let’s chant. - Read in chorus. - Tell pupils that they are going to say the chant 3. Let’s chant. How much is/are……..?Follow the procedure in Teaching the unit components in Introduction. - Ss observe - Have them read the chant and check comprehension. - Play the recording a few times for pupils to do choral and individual repetition. Show them how - Ss listen. to chant and do the actions. - Divide the class into two halves: one haft says - One haft says the questions and the questions and the other half says the answers. the other half says the answers. The two halves swap their roles after the first - Ss practise. round - The whole class repeat the 3. Reinforcement. chant - Tell the content of the lesson. - Practise with their friends ask and answer about - Students remember. How much is/are...? 4. Homelink. - Prepare the next period Period 117 Unit 17: HOW MUCH IS THE T-SHIRT ? Lesson3: 4,5,6 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Use the words and phrases related to the topic Prices of clothes. - Read and complete about the table. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(197) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Draw three clothing items and write the prices. - Develop students' speaking and writing skills. II. Language focus: - Vocabulary : a pair of socks, a pair of slippers - Structures: Review III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: Laptop, recordings, projector, book, pictures….. 2. Students’:student’s book, notebook, workbook. IV. Procedures. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Warm up. - Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson. - Whole the class using a louder Have a class pronounce two-syllable words with voice for the first syllable. the stress on the first syllable. Remind them to use a louder voice for the first syllable. You may ask them to clap at the stressed syllable as they say the words. Here are some words you may use‘sandals, ‘ trousers,’jumper , ‘jacket, ‘yellow. 2. Activities. 2.4. Read and complete. 4. Read and complete. Open the book on page 51. Tell the class that they are going to read the text and complete the table. - Spend a few minutes having pupils play the game - Play the game Bang. Bang. - Write these words on separte pieces of paper: a blouse,a short skirt, a red scaft, a pair of sandals, a jacket, a jumper, along skirt. A pair of socks, a pair of shoes, a pair of trousers and a pair of slippers. Fold them in haft and put them in a box. Add a few pieces that say BANG! Pupils take turns picking piece of paper. If they read the words a loud correctly. They will get to keep the paper. If they - Write down the notebook. draw a BANG! card) to the box. The pupils who has the most cards at the end of the game is the winner. Complete the table individual. - Give newwords: A pair of socks, a pair slippers. - Check the answer. - Introduce the task. Set a time limit for pupils to read the text and complete the table. Circulate to monitor and offer help, if necessary. - Get pupils to swap and correct their answers before checking as a class. Key: At school At home Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(198) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 On hot days. a blouse,a short skirt, a red scaft, and a pair of sandals On cold days a jacket over a jumper, along skirt.a red scaft and a pair of socks and shoes,. a blouse,a pair of shorts and a pair of slipppers a jumper, a pair of trousers a pair of socks and slipppers. 2.5.Draw three clothing items and write their prices. - Introduce the activity by saying Now it’s time for you to draw your three favourite clothing items and write their prices. - Draw a few sketches of clothes on the board as examples. - Set a time for them to do the task in silence. When time is up, get two or three pupils to show their drawings and read aloud their writing. Key: Pupils’s own answers. 2.6. Project. - Tell pupils that they are going to make four flashcards of clothes. - Give each pupil four card, and also some crayons a d colour pencils for drawing. They shuold draw a clothing item on one side of each card and write the word for it on the other side. Then they should show the flashcards to the class and talk about them. Key: Pupils’ own answers 3. Reinforcement. - Tell the content of the lesson. 4. Home link. - Prepare the next period.. 5.Draw three clothing items and write their prices. - Listen to the teacher. - Look at the board. - Do the task individual. - Read aloud their writing. - Some pupils to their drawings and read aloud their writing. 6. Project. - Whole class - Word individual. -Interview classmate to get information about their clothes. - Some pupils to the front of the class to report on work. - Ss listenSs remember.. Period 118 UNIT18: WHAT ‘S THE PHONE NUMBER?. Lesson 1: 1, 2, 3 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Use the words and phrases related to the topic Phone numbers and Outdoor activities. - Ask and answer questions about phone numbers, using What’s....’s phone number? It’s……… Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(199) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Develop Ss' listenig and speaking skills. II. Language focus: * Vocabulary : phone number,mobile phone * Sentence pattern : What’s....’s phone number? It’s……… III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: Laptop, recordings, projector, book, pictures….. 2. Students’:student’s book, notebook, workbook. IV. Procedures. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Warm up. - Prepare ps for this unit by revising numbers from - Whole the classcount from zero to nine . Write the numbers randomly on the zero to nine board. Point at each of them and have pupils say the number. Point at a quicker pace to make it more challenging. 2. Activities. 2.1. Look, listen and repeat. 1. Look, listen and repeat. - Introduce the lesson by saying Look at the pictures - Open the textbook. and read a story in which the characters ask and answer questions about phone number, using - Listen to the conversation What’s....’s phone number? carefully. It’s……… - Give a few minutes for pupils to look at the four pictures to discuss the context in which the language is used. Ask them questions such as Who are they? Where are they? What are they talking about?( Nam and Linda are at school. In Pictures a,b and c they are talking about Linda’s new mobile phone. In picture d ,Nam asks Linda for her phone number, Using What’s your phone number? and Linda answers It’s 0912 158657). - Give newwords: phone number, mobile phone - Write the notebook. - Play the recording so they can listen and repeat. Do - Listen to one by one sentence choral and individual repetition,pointing to the and repeat. characters speaking. - Play the recording again for pupils to listen and - Work in pair and practice repeat. speaking. - Demonstrate the dialogue. - Correct the mistakes (if any). 2.2. Point and say. - Tell the class that they are going to practise asking 2. Point and say. and answering questions about phone numbers, - Open the book, work in pairs, using What’s....’s phone number? point the pictures, ask and It’s……… answer the questions about Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(200) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Have them to look the phone numbers in pictures and the names under them. Point to Picture a and have them say the phone number. Do choral and individual repetition. Then tell the class to work in pairs and practise asking and anwering questions about phone numbers, using the text in the bubbles and the picture cues. - Do an example with a pupil using Picture a. Then have pupils work in pairs before inviting one or two pairs to role- play the dialogue. - Point to the first picture and ask them. Then have them put the word and phrase into the blanks in the bubbles and say ‘ - Sentence Patterns: T:What’s....’s phone number? It’s……… - Ask ps to work in pairs and do the task. - Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class. Work in pairs. Ask your partners ‘s phone numbers. - Tell pupils that they are going to work in pairs and ask and answer questions about the phone number, using What’s....’s phone number? It’s……… Ask them to write their own phone number on a piece of paper. - Have them work in pairs, one asking and the other giving the answer. - Call on a few pairs to act out the dialouge in front of the class. Correct the pronunciation, if necessary. 3. Reinforcement. - Tell the content of the lesson. 4. Home link. - Prepare the next period.. phone numbers. - Look at the pictures and count the number. - Go to the board and make the conversation. - Correct the mistakes (if any). - Form group.. a. What’s Lily’s phone number? It’s 098 207 4511 - Write the notebook. - Work in pairs.. -Write their own phone number on a piece of paper. - Work in pairs, one asking and the other giving the answer. -. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(201) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017. V: Evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………….. ……………………….. …………………………………………………………………. WEEK 31. Date of teaching: from 17/4 to 22 /4 /2017 Period 119 UNIT18: WHAT’S THE PHONE NUMBER?. Lesson 1: 4,5,6 I. Objectives: By the end of this unit, students can: - Use the words and phrases related to the topic Phone number and outdoor activities. - Ask and answer questions about phone numbers, using What’s….’s phone number? It’s…….. - Improve: Listening and speaking skill. II. Language focus. Vocabulary: mobile phone and different phone numbers. Sentence Pattern: What’s …..’s phone number? It’s +(number). III. Teaching aids: Student’s book Tieng Anh 4, Tap 2 Audio and visual aids Recordings, projector, sticky tape. IV.Procedures. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Warm up. - Ps ask and answer work in Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson. Call a pair. few pairs to the front of the class to ask and answer the +What’s Hien’s phone question What’s……’s phone number? number? It’s 0973291197... 2. Activities. 2.3. Listen and tick. 3. Listen and tick. -Tell the class that they are going to listen to three - Open the book on page 53 dialogues about phone numbers and tick the correct pictures. - Have pupils look at the pictures to identify that each - Look at the pictures show picture shows one phone number. Ask them how these one phone number. phone numbers are said in English. Have them to point to each of the pictures and say aloud the phone number in English. - Play the recording more than once, if necessary. Ask -Answer the questions. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(202) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Ps to listen to the recording and tick the correct pictures. Tell them to focus on the phone numbers. - Get Ps to swap their answers before you check as a class. Audio script 1. Mai: What’s your phone number, Tom? Tom: It’s oh-nine-nine-nine, two-nine-one, two-ninesix. Mai: Can you say it again? Tom: Oh-nine-nine-nine, two-nine-one, two-nine-six. Mai: Thank you. 2. Nam: What’s your phone number, Mai? Mai: Oh-nine-nine-eight, oh-nine-three, five-nine-six. Nam: Oh-nine-nine-eight, oh-nine-three, er……? Mai: five- nine- six. Nam: Thanks, Mai. 3. Mary: Do you have Mr Loc’s phone number, Quan? Quan: Just a minute… It’s oh- nine-nine-oh, twoeight-three, eight-five-five. Mary: Oh-nine-nine-oh, two-eight-three, eight-fivefive,right?. Quan: That’s right. Mary: Thank you very much. Key:1- b 2- c 3- a 2.4. Look and write. - Tell Ps that they are going to write phone numbers. - Have them look at the pictures to identify the phone numbers. Ask them how these phone numbers are said in English. - Give pupils time to do the task independently. Remind them to write the words for the numbers. - Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. Key. 2. It’s oh-nine-eight-five, oh-nine-seven, oh-ninenine. 3. It’s oh-nine-one-two, two-eight-three, eight-oh-four. 2.5. Let’s sing. - Tell pupils that they are going to sing the song What’s Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. - Listen the recording.. - Listen the recording again. - Check the answers. 4. Look and write. -Look at the pictures.. - Listen to the teacher. - Write down the notebook. - Read after the teacher.. 5. Let’s sing. - Listen to the teacher..

(203) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 your phone number? Teach the song, following the procedure in Teaching the unit components in Introduction. - Have them read each line of the lyrics aloud. Check comprehension. - Play the recording all the way through. Ask Ps to do choral and individual repetition of the song line by line. - When pupils are familiar with the tune, ask a pair to the - Ps sings pair. front of the class. Each of them sings one line of the song. Then the class sings the song and clap hands. 3. Reinforcement. - Tell the content of the lesson. - Practise with their friends talk about What’s …..’s - Ss remember phone number? It’s…………. 4. Home link. - Prepare the next period. Period 120 UNIT18: WHAT ‘S THE PHONE NUMBER?. Lesson 2: 1, 2, 3 I. Objectives:: By the end of the lesson, pupils can Use the words and phrases related to the topics Phone numbers and outdoor activities. Accept and decline an invitation, using Would you like to….? I’d love to./ Sorry, I can’t II. Language focus: - Vocabulary:go for a picnic, call me back, go for a walk, go fishing, go skating. - Structures: Would you like to…….? I’d love to./ Sorry, I can’t. III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: audio, recordings, student’s book, pictures….. 2. Students’:student’s book, notebook and workbook,…. IV. Procedure: Teacher's activities Student’s activities 1. Warm up. Ask some pupils to go to the front of the class to sing - Whole class let’s sing please! the song What’s your phone number? The rest of the class sing along and clap hands. 2. Activities. 2. 1. Look, listen and repeat. 1. Look, listen and repeat. -Tell the class that they are going to read a story in - Open the book page 54. which the characters accept and decline an invitation, using Would you like to….? I’d love to./ Sorry, I can’t. - Guess using Would you like…? - Have pupils look at the three pictures to understand I’d love to. / Sorry, I can’t.. . .. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(204) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 how the language is used. Ask questions such as Who are they? Where are they? And What are they saying?( In picture a, Peter is calling Mai from his home, asking May I speak to Mai, please? And Mai replies Speaking. Who is it? Then Peter asks Would you like to go for a picnic? And Mai answers Yes, I’d love to.) Check comprehension. - Play the recording a few times for pupils to listen and repeat. Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking. - Play the recording again so they can listen and repeat. Language note:I’d love to is the contracted form of I would love to. 2.2. Point and say. -Tell pupils that they are going to practise making and accepting/ declining an invitation, using Would you like to…? I’d love to or Sorry, I can’t. - Have them look at the pictures to understand the collocations go for a walk, go for a picnic, go fishing and go skating. Point to picture a and have them repeat the words under it. Do choral and individual repetition. Then tell the class to practice making an invitation and accepting or declining it in pairs. - Repeat the same procedure with the rest of the pictures. Do choral and individual repetition and then practice in pairs. - Call a few pairs to act out the dialogues in front of the class. Check as a class and correct pronunciation, if necessary. 2.3. Let’s talk. - Tell pupils that they are going to revise what they have learnt in Lessons 1 and Lesson 2.Remind them of the questions May I speak to…? Would you like to….? What’s your phone number/ and how to respond to these questions. - Ask them work in pairs: one pupil asks the questions and the other gives the answers. Remind them to use Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. - Listen and repeat. - Do choral and individual repetition.. 2. Point and say. - Whole class look at the pictures. - Write down the notebook. - The rest of the class observer. - Individual. - Pairs of work.. 3. Let’s talk. - Whole class repeat each sentence. * Hello. May I speak to….., please/ * Would you like to……..? * What’s your phone number? - Work in pairs..

(205) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 facts about themselves. Go around offering help. Correct pronunciation, if necessary. - Call on a few pairs act out the dialogue in front of the class. 3. Reinforcement. - Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Tell the content of the lesson. 4. Homelink.- Prepare the next period. Period 121 UNIT18: WHAT ‘S THE PHONE NUMBER?. Lesson 2: 4,5,6 I. Objectives:: By the end of this unit, pupils can. - Accept and decline an invitation, using Would you like to…..? I’d love to. / Sorry, I can’t. - Develop Ss' speaking and listening skills. II. Language focus: - Vocabulary:go for a walk, go for a picnic, go fishing, go skating. - Structures:Hello. May I speak to…., please?Would you like to…? What’s your phone number? III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: audio, recordings, projector, book, pictures….. 2. Students’:student’s book, notebook, workbook. IV. Procedure: Teacher's activities Student’s activities 1. Warm up. - Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson. Invite - Pupils ask and answers some pairs of pupils to go to the front of the class asking + Hello. May I speak to…., and answering the questions May I speak to….? Would please? you like to…? + Would you like…? 2. Activities. 2.4. Listen and circle. 4. Listen and circle. -Tell the class that they are going to listen to four - Whole class open the book dialogues and circle the correct words or phone numbers page 55. to complete the sentences. - Give pupils a few seconds to read the incomplete sentences in silence and guess the answer to fill in the gap. - Play the recording more than once, if necessary, for pupils to listen and circle the answers. - Listen and do the task. - Get Ps to swap their answers before you check as a class. Monitor the activity and offer help, if necessary. - Individual Key:1.a 2.b 3.a 4.b Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(206) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Audio script 1. Tom: Would you like to go skating this Sunday, Mai? Mai: Sorry, I can’t. I can’t skate. Tom: What about going for a picnic? Mai: Yes, I’d love to. 2. Tom: Would you to go fishing tomorrow, Phong? Phong: Sorry, but I don’t like fishing. Tom: Would you like to go skating? Phong: I’d love to. 3. Tom: You have a new mobile phone. Linda: Yes. Tom: It looks very nice. What’s your phone number? Linda: It’s 0999 291 196 Tom: 0999 291 196? Linda: That’s right. 4. Mai: What’s your phone number, Nam? Nam: It’s 0463 393 845. Mai: Can you say it again? Nam: 0463 393 845. Mai: Thank you.. 2.5. Look and write. -Tell pupils that they are going to write questions, using the given answers and the picture cues. - Have them read the answers and the incomplete questions. Then ask them to look at the picture above each question and guess the words to complete the questions. - Set a time limit for Ps to do the task independently. Go around and offering help, if necessary. - Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. Key: 1. to go swimming 2. Would you like to go for a picnic. 3. your phone number 4. May I speak to 2.6. Let’s play. - Tell pupils that they are going to play the game Find the phone numbers. -Prepare 30 small pieces of paper. On each of them, write a number from 0 to 9 so that there are in total three instances of each number. Put the pieces of paper in a box. - Ask two pairs of pupils to come out and stand next to the box. Say a phone number. The pair is quicker to find Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. 5. Look and write. - Listen to the teacher. - Identify the activities in parts.. - Write individual. - Work in pairs.. 6. Let’s play. - Listen to the teacher.. - Play game in group..

(207) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 the correct numbers from the box and put them in the - Whole class correct order gets a point and continues to play the game - Pupils remember. with another pair. The pair that gets the most points at the end of the game is the winner. 3. Reinforcement. - Repeats the sentence pattern. - Remark the lesson. 4. Home link. - Prepare the next period Lesson 3. Period 122 UNIT18: WHAT ‘S THE PHONE NUMBER?. Lesson 3: 1, 2, 3 I. Objectives:By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Use the words and phrases related to the topic Phone numbers and outdoor activities. - Pronounce two- syllable words with the stress on the second syllable: re’peat, en’joy, in’vite and com’plete - Develop students' speaking and listening skills. II. Language focus:- Vocabulary and structures: Review III. Resources: 1. Teacher’s: Laptop, recordings, projector, book, pictures….. 2. Students’:student’s book, notebook, workbook. IV. Procedures. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Warm up. - The whole class play game speak - Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson. the phone numbers. Have pupils play the game say the phone numbers again. 2. Activities. 1. Listen and repeat. 2.1. Listen and repeat. - Students open book page 56. - Tell pupils that they are going to practise * re’peat pronouncing the following words: re’peat, en’joy, Can you repeat that? invite and com’plete. * en’joy - First, put the words re’peat, en’joy, in’vite and She en’joys the party. com’plete on the board, with the stress marks. * in’vite - Play the recording and ask pupils to repeat the They in’vite me to go for a picnic. words a few times. Then put the four sentences on * com’plete the board. Play the recording more than once, if We have to com’plete the necessary, and let pupils say the sentences paying sentences. attention to the target words and stress. - Do choral and individual repetition of the words and sentences until pupils feel confident. - Ss listen. - Get some pupil to say the sentences, white the rest - Ss observe. of the class claps at the stressed syllables of the Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(208) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 target words. Correct the pronunciation, if necessary. 2.2. Listen and circle. Then say the sentences aloud. - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and circle the correct answers. - Give them a few seconds to read the sentences in silence and guess the words to fill the gaps. - Have pupils listen to the recording and circle the answers. Go around and offer help, if necessary. - Have them swap their answers before checking as a class. Then ask them to read aloud the answers. Key: 1a; 2b; 3b; 4a. Audio script: 1. I enjoy my English lesson. 2. I want to invite some friends to my party. 3. They enjoy playing badminton. 4. Now complete the sentence with these words. 2.3. Let’s chant. - Tell pupils that they are going to say the chant I’d like to invite you to my party. Follow the procedure in Teaching the unit components in Introduction. - Have them read the chant and check comprehension. - Play the recording a few times for pupils to do choral and individual repetition. Show them how to chant and do the actions. Call two groups to give demonstration. - Get groups to sit opposite of each other and practice chanting and doing actions. Go around offering help, if necessary. - Call two groups to the front of the class to chant and do actions. The rest of the class claps along to the rhythm. 3. Reinforcement. - Tell the content of the lesson. - Practise with their friends ask and answer about Let’s go to the………….. Why do you want to ………….? Because I want some/ see………… 4. Homelink. - Prepare the next period. 2. Listen and circle. Then say the sentences aloud. - Listen and circle the answer and then say the sentences aloud. - Look at the sentences. - Practice reading the sentences. - Read in chorus. - Listen to the teacher and do the task.. 3. Let’s chant. - Ss observe - Ss listen.. - One group repeats each line of the chant, the other clap the syllables. - Ss practise. - The whole class repeat the chant - Students remember.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(209) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017. V: Evaluation: ……………..………………………..……………………………………............. .....................................................................…………………………………. WEEK 32. Date of teaching: from 24/4 to 29 /4 /2017 Period 123 UNIT18: WHAT ‘S THE PHONE NUMBER?. Lesson 3: 4, 5, 6 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Read and complete the text - Write in the gaps about themselves. II. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Review - Vocabulary: Review III. Resources: Media, computer, text book… IV. Procedure Teacher’s activities Students’ activities * Warm up - Read the chant on page 56 - Read the chant * New lesson 4. Read and complete. 4. Read and complete. - Tell ss that they are going to read the text about Tom’s picnic with his family tick true or false and complete the paragraph. - Tell ps to read the sentences under the text and - Read and work individually guess which sentences is true ang which one is false. - Do the task independently. - Give them time to do task. - Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary - Work in pairs - Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction - Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. - Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. - Have the whole class read each sentence in - Listen and comment. chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(210) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Key: 1. F 2. T 3. F 4. T 5. T 5. Let’s write - Tell ps that they are going to write about a short paragraph about themselves. - Work in pairs to discuss what they are going to write in the gaps of the sentences. - Give ss time to do the task indepensently. - Go around offering help, if necessary - Listen - Get them to swap their answers . 6. Project - Introduce the project and how to carry it. - Tell ps that they are going to ask 4 classmates for their phone number then report. - Work individually - Give each ss a card and ask them to copy the table from the pupils Book on their cards. - Listen - Model doing - Ask ss to work in pairs) - Listen - Check some Ps before class. - Help and correct their pronunciation. * Consolidation - Listen Summary the lesson - Pair work Period 124 UNIT19: WHAT ANIMAL DO YOU WANT TO SEE?. Lesson 1: 1, 2, 3 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Use the word and phrases related to the topic Zoo animals. - Ask and answer questions about where someone’s desire using What animal do you want to see? I want to see…. II. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What animal do you want to see? I want to see…. - Vocabulary: zoo, animal, kangaroo, crocodile, tiger, elephant, monkey, want. III. Resource: - Media, computer, text book… IV. Procedure Teacher’s activities Students’ activities * Warm up: Asking them to saythe names of five animals they - Answer T’s qs look in English. Then ask them if those animals can be found at the zoo. * New lesson 1. Look, listen and repeat. - Tell the class that they are going to find out about - Answer T’s qs how to ask and answer qs about popular festivals. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(211) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures page 30 and answer the questions: + Where are they? + What are they doing? - Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. - T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. - Call on one pair to role play. - Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on page 58. Elicit the names of the animals - Teach vocabulary: zoo, animal, kangaroo, crocodile, tiger, elephant, monkey, want. Model sentence: What animal do you want to see? I want to see….. - Look at the pictures - Answer. - Listen and repeat - Role play in pair - Repeat. - Look and find out the model - Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech sentences bubbles. - Ask them to point the pictures and role play using - Guess the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, - Point the pictures and practise assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Some pairs perform their task - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in at the front of the class. The rest chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. of the class observe and give * Work in pairs. comments. - Ask students to work in pairs with your classmates, ask and answer about the zoo animals - Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out - Practise in pairs - Give comments and correct their pronunciation. *Consolidation - Pair work Summary the lesson: When is + (festival)? It’s on Period 125 UNIT19: WHAT ANIMAL DO YOU WANT TO SEE?. Lesson 1:4,5,6 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Listen and tick the correct pictures. - Write about the zoo animals. II. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Review - Vocabulary: Review Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(212) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 III. Resources Media, computer, text book… IV. Procedure Teacher’s activities * Warm up Review the previous lesson by asking: What animal do you want to see? * New lesson 3. Listen and match - Have pupils look at pictures on page 59 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters and the zoo animals. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the pictures they hear. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and match the pictures. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1c, 2a, 3b 4. Look and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 59. Get Ss to identify the zoo animals. • Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the answers. • Ss read silently and complete the answers. • Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction • Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. He wants to see crocodiles 2. She wants to see monkeys 3. They want to see kangaroos 4. They want to see tigers 5. Let’s play - Have pupils open their books to page 59. - Introduce the game Charades - Show a pupil the name of a zoo animal. That pupil must act out the animal for the rest of the class to guess - The quickest pupil to say the name of the animal gets a point. Then select another pupil to mine. Students’ activities Answer T’s qs. Indentify the characters and the zoo animals - Listen and match - Listen and check - Answer. - Read and get information to write the answers. - Work individually - Trade the answers within pairs or groups for correction - Read the answers aloud to the cla. - Open the books to page 59. - Listen - Play the game. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(213) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 another animal. - The pupil who gets the most points at the end of the game is the winner. * Consolidation - Two Ps ask and answer about zoo animals Period 126 UNIT19: WHAT ANIMAL DO YOU WANT TO SEE?. Lesson 2: 1, 2, 3 I. Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, students will be able to: Express reasons, using I like… because …/I don’t like…because… II. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: I like… because …/I don’t like…because… - Vocabulary: funny, scary, bear, zebra, beautiful, fast III. Resources Media, computer, text book… IV. Procedure Teacher’s activities Students’ activities * Warm up Play the game Charades - Play the game * New lesson 1. Look, listen and repeat. 1. Look, listen and repeat. - Have Ss to look at the book at page 60 - Look at the pictures in the book - Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. - Teacher introduces some new words: funny, scary - Listen - Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles - Listen and repeat - Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Nam’s part and the other repeat Linda’s part. - Read in pairs - Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation Elicits the structures: I like… because …/I don’t like…because… 2. Point and say 2. Point and say - Look at 4 pictures - Have Ss look at the pictures on page 60 - Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Teacher introduces some new words: bear, zebra, beautiful, fast Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(214) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - T models in picture a; b; c; d - Ask them to act out the dialogue 1. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures - Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. - Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3. Let’s talk - Introduce the activity: Talking about What animal do you want to see? - Write down the answers to report your interview to the class later. - Pair work - Display in class, others comment - Give comments * Consolidation Summary the lesson: I like… because …/I don’t like…because…. - Point to the pictures and practise - Play role and speak out. - Work in pair practice talking - Repeat. - Pair work. V: Evaluation: …………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………..……. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(215) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017. WEEK 33. Date of teaching: from 1/5 to 6 /5 /2017 Period 127 UNIT19: WHAT ANIMAL DO YOU WANT TO SEE?. Lesson 2: 4,5,6 I. Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to: - Listen and write the answers - Write about zoo animals you like and express reasons. II. Language focus: - Sentence Patterns: Review - Vocabulary: Review III. Resources Media, computer, text book… IV. Procedure Teacher’s activities Students’ activities *Warm up Chatting - T asks Ss to explain why they like and do not like - Answer some animals * New lesson 4. Listen and write 4. Listen and write - Have pupils read 4 sentences in the book - Read 4 sentences in the - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the book recording and write the answers they hear. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and write. - Listen and write Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T - Ps answer give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1. big, 2. fast, 3. funny, 4. scary 5. Look and write. - Ask Ss to identify zoo animals and the possible - Work individually adjectives to express the reasons - Put ss in groups, write sentences about zoo animals - Work in groups and express the reasons. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(216) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary - Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. - Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. zebras, they are beautiful 2. crocodiles, they are scary 3. bears, they are big 4. kangaroos,they are fast 6. Let’s sing. - Introduce the song Why or Why not?? Have Ss read each line of the song. - Play the recording and listen to the song - Play the recording again for pupils to repeat each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands along the rhythm - Ask Ps to practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation * Consolidation Summary the lesson.. - Answer. - Listen.. - Repeat each line of the rhythm. - Play in groups. Period 128 UNIT19: WHAT ANIMAL DO YOU WANT TO SEE?. Lesson 3: 1, 2, 3 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Pronounce three-syllable words with the stress on the first syllable: ‘crocodile, ‘elephant, ‘beautiful, ‘wonderful - Listen and circle the right sounds. II. Language focus: 1, Vocabulary: beautiful, wonderful and enormous Phonics: ‘crocodile, ‘elephant, ‘beautiful, ‘wonderful 2, Sentence patterns: Review Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(217) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 III. Resources Media, computer, text book… IV. Procedure Teacher’s activities Students’ activities * Warm up Sing a song “Why or Why not?” - Sing a song “Happy new * New lesson year 1. Listen and repeat 1. Listen and repeat - Introduce the sounds: ‘crocodile, ‘elephant, ‘beautiful, ‘wonderful - Listen - Have Ps pay attendtion to the stress of 4 words - Play the CD and ask ss to repeat a few times - Listen and repeat - Show 4 sentences on the board to check Ps’ - Look at 4 sentences and understanding of the voc. read aloud. - Play the CD and ask ss to repeat a few times - Listen and repeat 2. Listen and circle. Then say the sentences aloud 2. Listen and circle. Then - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable say the sentences aloud words to fill in the blank. Listen and circle - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Listen - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1. b 2. b 3. a 4. b 3. Let’s chant 3. Let’s chant - Ps listen to the tape and - Introduce the Chant: chant I want to go to the zoo - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation * Consolidation Summary the lesson Period 129 UNIT19: WHAT ANIMAL DO YOU WANT TO SEE?. Lesson 3: 4,5,6 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Read and complete the text Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(218) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Write why they want to go to the zoo, what animal (s) they like and do not like, and the reasons. II. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Review - Vocabulary: Review III. Resources Media, computer, text book… IV. Procedure Teacher’s actions Students’ actions * Warm up - Read the chant on page 62 - Read the chant * New lesson 4. Read and complete. 4. Read and complete. - Tell ss that they are going to read the email about - Ss read the email individually Mai and Nam’s visit to the zoo and complete the - Read and work individually paragraph. - Explain the meaning of the new words perhaps and dangerous - Read and work individually - Tell ps to read the incomplete paragraph first then let them read the email and focus on the information neededto fill the gaps - Work in pairs - Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary - Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction - Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. - Listen and comment. - Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. - Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Key: 1. animals 2. beautiful/friendly/scary 3. big/dangerous 4. monkeys 5. funny 5. Write about you - Tell ps that they are going to write about a short paragraph about why they want to go to the zoo, - Listen what animal (s) they like and do not like, and the reasons. Remind them to use the guided qs and the wordsin the box. - Have ps do the task individually. - Have ps read aloud their writing - Work individually - Others give comments and ask some questions: 6. Project - Listen - Introduce the project and how to carry it. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(219) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Tell ps that they are going to draw and colour their - Listen favourite animal (s), and tell the class why they like it - Model doing - Ask ss to work in pair to brainstorm possible - Listen sentences to decribe their favourite animal (s) - Pair work - Check some Ps before class. - Help and correct their pronunciation. * Consolidation: Summary the lesson Period 130 UNIT 20: WHAT ARE YOU GOING TO DO THIS SUMMER? Lesson 1: 1, 2, 3 I. Objectives: After the lesson Ss will be able to: - Asking and answering questions about where someone plans to go. - Develop: Speaking and listening skills. II. Language focus: - Vocabulary: summer, summer holidays, bay, stay at home. - Sentence patterns: - Where are going this summer? – I’m going to........................ III. Teaching aids:-Student’s book, computer, recording, projectors, speakers IV. Procedure: Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up * Have Ps to say the chant on page 62. I want to go to the zoo 2. New lesson 2. 1.Look, listen and repeat - Tell the class that we are going to find out about how to ask and answer questions about where someone plans to go. - Introduce the dialogue, ask Ps to look at four pictures and answer questions such as: ? Who are they? ? What are they talking about? - Play the recording more than once, if necessary, for pupils to listen and repeat the language. - Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking.. Students’ activities - Ps say the chant.. - Listen to the teacher.. - Look at the pictures and identify the characters and answer the questions.. - Repeat a few times.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(220) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Have Ps to practise the dialogue in pairs - Call some pairs to role-play the dialogue in front of the class. 2. 2. Point and say. - Tell Ps that we are going to practise asking and answering questions about where someone plans to go. - Have Ps to look at the bubbles to understand how the language is used. Then ask Ps to look at four pictures to identify the four places in Viet Nam. - Point to the first picture and model the task with one pupil, using the question in the first bubble and the phrase under the picture for the answer: + T: Where are you going this summer? + P: I’m going to Phu Quoc. - Ask Ps to say the question and the answer chorally and individually. Repeat the same procedure with the rest of the pictures. - Ask pupils to practise in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the picture cues. Monitor the activity and offer help, if necessary. - Select some pairs of Ps to demonstrate the task in front of the class. 3. Reinforcement. - Have Ps to ask and answer questions about where someone plans to go. 4. Home link - Prepare new lesson 1- part 3,4,5 on page 65. - Do exercise into workbook.. - Do choral and individual reception - Ps practise the dialogue in pairs. - Ps role-play.. - Listen to instruction.. - Look at the bubbles. - Look at the pictures to identify the four places in Viet Nam. - Look at the first picture and listen to the model. - Look at the question and the answer, then read aloud.. - Work in pairs: one asks the question and the other gives the answer. - The rest of the class listen and give comment. - Ps practise. - Listen and write down.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(221) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 V: Evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………….. ……………………….. …………………………………………………………………. WEEK 34. Date of teaching: from 8/5 to 13 /5 /2017 Period 131 UNIT 20: WHAT ARE YOU GOING TO DO THIS SUMMER? Lesson 1: 4, 5, 6 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to: - Listen to the recording and tick the correct pictures. - Write the answers for the questions about where they are going. II. Languages focus: 1. Vocabulary: (review) 2. Sentence pattern: (review) III. Teaching aids: - Student’s book, computer, recording, projectors, speakers IV. Procedures: Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up. - Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson. Get some pairs of pupils to go to the front of the class to practise Where are you going this summer? I’m going to………. 2. New lesson. 2.1. Listen and tick. - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to three dialogues about the places the characters are going and tick the correct pictures. - Have Ps look at the pictures to identify the three places in Viet Nam and say the names aloud. - Play the recording more than once, if necessary, for pupils to listen to and tick the correct pictures. Tell them that they should focus on the places the characters are going to. - Get pupils to swap their answers before you. Students’ activities - Some pairs of Ps act out the dialogues. - The rest of the class listen and give comment. - Listen to the instruction. - Look at the pictures and identify: a) Ha Long Bay b) SaPa c) Nha Trang - Listen to the recording to tick the correct pictures. - Exchange their answers with. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(222) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 check as a class. Key: 1. c 2. a 3. b 3.2. Look and write. - Tell Ps that they are going to write the answers to the questions about where they are going, using the picture cues. - Give them a few seconds to look at the questions and answers and to identify the words they need to complete the answers. Then focus Ps on the pictures to identify where the characters want to go. - Give Ps time to do the task independently. Go around and offer help, if necessary. - Get Ps to swap their answers with their partners. - Call some Ps to read out their answers. If there is enough time, call some pairs to role-play the dialogues. Key: 1. I’m going to Da Nang 2. He’s going to Hoi An. 3. They’re going to Hue. 2.3. Let’s sing. - Tell Ps that they are going to sing the song. “You are happy in summer holiday!” - Teach the song, following the procedure in Teaching the unit components in Introduction. - Have Ps read each line of the lyrics aloud. - Do choral and individual repetition and check comprehension. - Play the recording all the way through. - Ask Ps to do choral and individual repetition of the song line by line. - When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask two group of Ps to the front of the class to perform the song. - If have time, T can change some words in the song by other words they learnt such as: Sam son beach/ Nha Trang beach/ 3. Reinforcement. - Have the class sing the song again and clap their hands to reinforce learning. 4. Home link. - Have Ps practise singing the song Let’s go…. at home. their partners.. - Listen to instruction. - Look at the questions and identify the missing words and where the characters want to go.. - Do the task individually. - Work in pairs to compare their answers. - Correct their answers.. - Listen to the teacher. - listen and write down on notebook. - Read each line of the lyrics. - Do choral and individual repetition - Listen to the recording. Do choral and individual repetition of the song line by line. - The rest of the class sing together and clap hands.. - Sing the song and clap hands.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(223) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Audio script: Mai: Once week until the summer holidays! Tony: Yes, I love summer. It’s a great time. Mai: Where are you going to this summer, Tony? Tony: I’m going to Nha Trang. Mai: Oh, I like Nha Trang very much. 3. Phong: Do you like summer, Linda? Linda: Yes, I do. I like summer holidays. Phong: Where are you going this summer? Linda: I’m going to Sa Pa. Phong: Great idea! It’s a lot of fun there. Period 132 SUMMER?. - Listen and remember. Linda: Not long until the summer holidays! Nam: Yes, I love summer holidays. Linda: Where are you going this Summer holidays? Nam: I’m going to Ha Long Bay. Linda: That’s great.. UNIT 20: WHAT ARE YOU GOING TO DO THIS. Lesson 2: 1, 2, 3 I. Objectives: After the lesson, students are able to: - Asking and answering questions about what someone plans to do. - Develop: speaking skill. II. Language focus: - Vocabulary: seafood, stay, build, sandcastles, go on a boat cruise. - Sentence patterns: What are you going to do? – I’m going to.... III. Teaching aids: - Student’s book, computer, recording, projectors, speakers IV. Procedures: Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up. - Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson by calling some Ps to the front of the class to sing the song “You are happy in summer holiday” 2. New lesson. 2.1. Look, listen and repeat. - Tell Ps that they are going to listen to the dialogue about how the characters ask and answer questions about future plans. - Ask Ps to look at the four pictures to identify the characters and the context in which the language is used. Ask them questions such as: Who are they? Where are they?. Students’ activities - Some Ps go to the front of the class to sing the song. The rest of the class listen and clap hands.. - Listen to the teacher. - Look at the pictures and identify the characters and the context. - Answer the questions.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(224) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 What are they doing? - Play the recording more than once, if necessary, for pupils to listen and repeat the language. - Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking. - Divide the class into two groups: one group role-play Linda and the other role-play Mai. - Play the recording again for Ps to listen and repeat. - Call some pairs to perform the task in front of the class. 2.2. Point and say. - Tell pupils that they are going to ask and answer questions about future plans. - Have Ps look at the bubbles to understand how the language is used. - Ask Ps to look at the four pictures to identify what the Ps are going to do in the future. - Teach the phrases: + stay in a hotel. +eat seafood. + build sandcastles. + go on a boat cruise. - Write them on the board and ask Ps to write them in their book. - Point to the first picture and model the task with one pupil, using the question in the first bubble and the phrase under the picture for the answer: + T: What are you going to do? + P: I’m going to stay in a hotel. - Ask Ps to say the question and the answer chorally and individually. Repeat the same procedure with the rest of the pictures. - Ask pupils to practise in pairs, using the prompts in the bubbles and the picture cues. Monitor the activity and offer help, if necessary. - Select some pairs of Ps to demonstrate the task in front of the class. 2.3. Let’s talk. - Tell Ps that they are going to revise what they have learnt in Lesson 1 and Lesson 2, using facts about themselves with two questions:. - Repeat the text a few times. - Do choral and individual reception - Ps practise. - Listen and repeat. - Ps practise in front of the class. - Listen to instruction. - Look at the bubbles. - Look at the picture and identify the what the Ps are going to do in the future. + stay in a hotel. +eat seafood. + build sandcastles. + go on a boat cruise. - Copy down in to their notebooks and repeat the new words a few times. - Look at the first picture and listen to the model.. - Look at the question and the answer the board and read aloud. - Work in pairs: one asks the question and the other gives the answer. - The rest of the class listen and give comment. - Listen to instruction.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(225) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 + What are you going this summer? + What are you going to do this summer? - Ask Ps to work in pairs: one asks the questions and the other gives the answers, using their own future plans. - Select some pairs to role-play in front of the class. 3. Reinforcement. - Ask some Ps to answer the questions in Activity 3. 4. Home link. - Prepare new lesson- lesson 2 (4, 5,6 ) on page 67. - Practise the model sentences at home. Period 133. - Work in pairs to do the task. - Some pairs act out the dialogue. - Answer the T’s questions. - Listen and remember.. UNIT 20: WHAT ARE YOU GOING TO DO THIS SUMMER? Lesson 2: 4, 5, 6. I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to: - Listen to the recording, circle and write the correct pictures. - Look at the pictures, write the answers to question What are they going to do? II. Languages focus: 1. Vocabulary: (review) 2. Sentence pattern: (review) III. Teaching aids: - Student’s book, computer, recording, projectors, speakers. IV. Procedures Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up. - Spend a few minutes revising the previous lesson by playing Spot the odd one out. Follow the procedure in Games in Introduction. You may use the names of the places and phrases of future plans that Ps have learnt in the previous lesson. 2. New lesson. 2.1. Listen and circle. - Tell pupils that they are going to listen to four dialogues about Phong and circle correct pictures. - Have Ps look at the sentences to read the sentences to identify the possible words to fill the gaps. Then have Ps to look at the pictures and guess what Phong is going to do in summer.. Students’ activities - Listen to the rule then play the game.. - Listen to instruction. - Look at the sentences and identify them.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(226) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Play the recording more than once, if necessary, for pupils to listen to and circle the pictures. - Ask them to focus on what Phong is going to do in summer. Them have them complete the sentences. - Get Ps to swap their answers before you check as a class. Key: 1. a 2. b 3. a 4.a 3.2. Look and write. - Tell Ps that they are going to write the answers to the question what are they going to do? - Ask Ps to look at the incomplete to identify the missing information they need to fill in. Then ask Ps to look at the pictures to identify what the Ps are going to do. After that, have them find appropriate phrases to complete the sentences. - Give Ps time to do the task independently. Go around offering help, if necessary. - Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. If there is enough time, call some pairs of pupils to act out the dialogues. Key: 1. Mai is going to Phu Quoc. 2. Tom is going to swim in the sea. 3. Peter and Linda are going to Sa Pa. 4. Nam and Phong are going to play football. 3.3. Let’s play. - Tell Ps that they are going to play the game Say where - Put a large map of Viet Nam on the board and highlight some major cities/ places. - Divide the class into groups of four and ask three groups of Ps to stand in three lines facing the board. - Ask Ps: ? Where are you going this summer holiday? - The first P in group 1 answers : + We’re going to + (name of a place) - The first Ps in the other two groups have to find the place on the map and point at it. The quicker Ps wins a point for the group. - The groups take turns to answer the question and the Ps who have answered or pointed should go to the end of the queues. - After all Ps have had a go, the group with the. - Listen to the recording and do the task. - Listen and complete the sentences.. - Listen to the teacher. - Look at the pictures and identify. Read the incomplete sentences.. - Do the task individually. - Work in pairs to compare their answers.. - Listen to instruction. - Stand in groups.. - Play the game.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(227) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 most points is the winner. Then ask another three groups to play the game. You may ask the winners to play a final. 3. Reinforcement. - Have the whole class to ask and answer questions to circle in the class. 4. Home link. - Get Ps to prepare the next lesson: Lesson 3 (1, 2,3) on page 68.. - Ps practise asking and answering in front of the class.. - Listen and remember. UNIT 20: WHAT ARE YOU GOING TO DO THIS SUMMER? Lesson 3; 1,2,3 I. Objectives: - After the lesson, students are able to: + Pronounce correctly the sound of the stress marks (’). + To listen and circle the correct options and write the answer to complete the sentences. + Develop: Listening and speaking skills. II. Language focus: - Phonics: the stress marks (’) of words: de’licious, e’normous, No’vember, De’cember. III. Teaching adis:- Student’s book, computer, recording, projectors, speakers. IV. Procedure. Period 134. Teacher’s activities. 1.Warm up: - Have Ps to practice asking and answering questions about future places. 2. New lesson. 2. 1. Listen and repeat. - Ask Ps to open their book on page 68 - Tell the class that we are going to practise pronouncing the words: de’licious, e’normous, No’vember, De’cember. - Ask Ps to look at the words on the board. Pronounce the focused sounds a few times as in model in chorus, pairs and groups. - Play the recording for Ps to listen and repeat the words a few times. - Ask Ps to look at four sentences.. Students’ activities. - Ps practice in pairs or groups.. - Open their book on page 68. - Look and listen to teacher.. - Listen and pronounce these sounds correctly. - Observe and listen. - Ps observe four sentences. - Listen and repeat a few times in. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(228) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - play the recording more than once, if necessary, and let Ps say the sentences, paying attention to the word stress. - Give the model sentences and repeat in chorus. - Do choral and individual repetition of the words and sentences until Ps feel confident. - Ask Ps to repeat the sentences, while the rest of the class claps at the stress syllables of the target words. Correct pronunciation, if necessary. 2. 2. Listen, circle and write. Then say aloud. - Tell Ps that we are going to listen to the recording and complete the sentences. - Give them a few seconds to read the sentences in silence and guess the word to fill the gap of each sentence. You may ask Ps to say the words aloud. - Play the recording for Ps to listen a few times. - Ask Ps to listen to the recording and circle the correct answers. - Give Ps to time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. - Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. - Write the correct answers on the board for Ps copy down into their books. - Then ask Ps to say aloud the sentences in chorus, pairs and groups. - Feedback, correct and remark. Give answers: 1 - b, 2 - b, 3 – a, 4-a.. chorus, pairs and groups. - Listen and repeat.. - Ps say the sentences, paying particular attention to the target words and syllables.. - Ps look at four sentences then you are going to listen and circle the correct answers. - Read in silence a few seconds.. - Listen to the recording. - Listen to the recording and circle the correct answers. - Do the task individual. - Ps swap and check their answers. - Ps copy down into their books. - Ps say aloud the sentences in chorus, pairs and groups. - Ps write down. 1 - b, 2 - b,. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan. 3 – a, 4- a.

(229) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Audio script: 1. Seafood is expensive. 2. We stay in an enormous hotel. 3. We are going to Ho Chi minh this November. 4. Is your holiday in September. 2. 3. Let’s chant. - Tell Ps that we are going to say the chant. “Where are you going?” - Have Ps to read the chant and check comprehension. - Follow the procedure in teaching the unit components in the introduction. - Play the recording a few tines for Ps to do choral and individual repetition. Show Ps how to chant and do the actions. - Call two groups of four to give a demonstration. - Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practise chanting and doing the actions. Go around to offer help, if necessary. - Call two groups to the front of the class to chant and do the actions. The rest of the class claps along to the rhythm of the chant. 3. Consolidation: - Have Ps to read again the chant. 4.Home link: - Do the exercises in workbook. - Practise reading the chant at home.. - Listen to the song: “Where are you going?” - Read the chant a few times. - Listen. - Listen to recording a few times to do choral and individual. - Practise the model. - Practise chanting and doing the actions. - Groups practise in front of the class to chant and do the actions.. - Ps read the chant. - Listen and summary.. V: Evaluation: Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(230) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 …………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………..………………………………………………………………. WEEK 35 Period 135. Date of teaching: from 15/5 to 20 /5 /2017 UNIT 20: WHAT ARE YOU GOING TO DO THIS SUMMER? Lesson 3: 4, 5, 6. I. Objectives: - After the lesson, students are able to: + Read the text and complete the sentences. + Write about the future plan for summer holiday. + Develop: reading and writing skills. II. Language focus: 1. Vocabulary: review 2. Sentence: review III. Teaching adis: - Student’s book, computer, recording, projectors, speakers. IV. Procedure. Teacher’s activities 1. Warm – up - Have Ps pronounce three- syllable words with the stress on the second syllable. Delicious, enormous, November, December, dictation, expensive, September, October. 2. New lesson: 2. 4. Read and complete. - Tell the class that they are going to read the text about summer holidays and complete the sentences. - Have Ps to read the incomplete sentences under the text and guess what words they need to fill the gaps. Focus them on the future plans. Check comprehension: ? Where are they going? ? Where are they going to stay?. Students’ activities - Ps listen and pronounce.. - Listen to the Teacher.. - Ps read the text and complete sentences. - Listen and answer the questions.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(231) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 ? Where are they going to do there? - Ask Ps to read the text to find appropriate information to complete the sentences. - Get Ps to work in pairs or groups. - Give them time to do the task independently. Go around and offer help. - Get Ps to swap their answers. If there is enough time, let some pairs ask and answer the questions. Key: 1. Ha Long bay 2. a nice hotel (by the sea) 3. swim in the sea. 4. a boat cruise 5. delicious seafood. 2. 5. Write about the plan for your summer holidays. - Tell Ps that they are going to write a short paragraph about the plan for their summer holidays. They may use Activity 4 to help them. - Have them work in pairs or groups to discuss what are they going to write. Remind them to use the suggested questions in the Ps’ Book. Check comprehension. - Give Ps time to do the task independently. Go around and offer help. - Get them to swap their answers before checking as a class. - If there is time, ask one P to write their paragraph on the board. Key: Ps’ own answers. 2. 6. Project. - Tell Ps that they are going to work in pairs. - Ps read the text to find appropriate information to complete the sentences. - Ps work in pairs or groups.. - Ps swap their answers and give the answers. Key: 1. Ha Long bay 2. a nice hotel (by the sea) 3. swim in the sea. 4. a boat cruise 5. delicious seafood.. - Listen to the teacher.. - Ps work in pairs or groups to discuss what are they going to write.. - Ps do the task independently. - Ps swap their answers. - Ps write their paragraph on the board.. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(232) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 and ask their partners about their holiday plans, using the five given questions. They should make notes and then tell the class about their partners’ plans. - T may do an example with one P, asking him/ her the questions and then reporting his/ her plans to the class. - If there is not enough time. Ask the Ps to do the interview after class and report the results in the next lesson. Example: Good morning, class. I’d like to tell you Linh’s plan for the summer holidays. She’s going to Ha Long bay in summer. She’s going there with her family. She’s going to stay in a hotel. She’s going to swim at the beach and play volleyball with her sisters. Thank you for listening. Key: Ps’ own answers. 3. Reinforcement. - Have Ps to tell about their holiday. 4. Home link. - Prepare next lesson: Review 4 at page 70. - Do exercise in work book.. - Listen to the teacher.. - Ps listen and answer questions.. - Ps interview their classmates and report the results to the class.. - Listen and summary. - Listen and write down.. Period 136 SHORT STORY: CAT AND MOUSE I. Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, students will be able to PRACTICE all the knowledge they have learn. Develop speaking, reading and writing skills. - Ss look after , solve problems and study themselves. - Studious and obedient students and love their friends. II. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. - Techniques: Ask and answer (say individually);Work in pairs/ groups;Discuss. III. Teaching aids: - Teacher’s aids: student’s and teacher’s book, word cards, pictures, puppets. - Students’ aids: books, notebooks, workbooks. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(233) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 IV. Languages focus: Vocabulary: about Cat and Mouse V. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm up: Chatting about - Respond. what did people do. 1. Read and listen to story - Ss look at the picture and read the story in individual. - Guide Ss to read the - Read the text and guess the words to replace the red story. words. - Ss look at the picture carefully & listen to the tape and correct the words. - Correction. - Read in group ( Ss role play among the class) . Others give comments 2. Work in pairs. Put the - Ss do the task, write down the sentences words in the correct order. independently. - Guide Ss to put the - Ss check each other their answers in pairs for words in the correct order. correction. - 4-5 pairs read aloud the conversation. Others give comments. - Check and correct. 3.Correct the wrong sentences( two are correct) - Guide Ss to correct the wrong sentences. - Offer the help when necessary. - correct. 4. Unscramble these words from conversation - Guide Ss to complete the words. - Correct. Homework:. - Ss read the sentences and see if they are right or wrong and then correct the wrong ones. - Do the task independently. Then check each other for correction. - 4-5 Ss respond the answers. The rest of class give comments. - Ss unscramble in individual. - Some Ss to write on the board. The rest of class give comments. - Review all for the test Period 137. REVIEW. I. Objectives - Help students to review all the structure from unit 16 to unit 20. Review the words, do exercises in the book. Develop: 4 skills. - Ss look after , solve problems and study themselves. - Studious and obedient students and love their friends. II. Language focus: - Vocabulary: unit 16-20 - Sentence patterns: unit 16-20 III. Teaching methods: Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(234) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 - Communicative approach. - Techniques: Ask and answer (say individually);Work in pairs/ groups;Discuss. IV. Resources: - Recording, tape and pictures, student’s book , Workbook V. Procedure Teacher’s work Students’ activities Warm up: Net work game. - Work in group of 5. Activities Plans to go Zoo animals Area Clothes. - Check some groups. 1. Listen and tick. -Guide Ss to look the pictures, listen and tick.. - Check and correct.. 2. Read and circle - Guide Ss to read the text, circle and complete the sentences.. - Ss find the words and put in to the right groups. - Ss look at the pictures in part 1(p70) to identify the similarities and differences among them, guess the answer to tick. - Listen three times and tick the answer that they hear. Then write the words that they heard. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner - 4 Ss respond the answer. Others give comment. - Listen again and check. Ss retell what they have heard. - Read the text and the sentencesin silence and do the task independently. - Compare the answer with the partner - 4-6 Ss respond the answer. Others give comments.. - Do at home. - Check as a class. Reinforcement - homelink. - Have ss review the lesson and prepare the test. Period 138 REVIEW I. Objectives - Help students to review all the structure from unit 16 to unit 20. Review the words, do exercises in the book. Develop: 4 skills. - Ss look after , solve problems and study themselves. - Studious and obedient students and love their friends. II. Language focus: - Vocabulary: unit 16-20 - Sentence patterns: unit 16-20 Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(235) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 III. Teaching methods: - Communicative approach. - Techniques: Ask and answer (say individually);Work in pairs/ groups;Discuss. IV. Resources: - Recording, tape and pictures, student’s book , Workbook V. Procedure Teacher’s work Students’ activities Warm up: Slap the board. - Work in group of 3. - Check some groups. - Ss find the words and put in to the right groups. 3. Read and match. -Guide Ss to read and match. - Ss read the questions on the left and pair them with the answers on the right by drawing a line between - Provide explanation, if them independently. necessary. - Compare the answer with the partner. - A few pairs act out the dialogues. Others give - Check and correct. comment. 4. Write the answer - Guide Ss to complete the - Read the questions, look at the pictures and write sentences. the answers. - Do the task independently. - Monitor the activity and offer - Compare the answer with the partner. help if necessry. - Some pairs to act out converrsations in front of - Check as a class. class. The rest of class give comments. 5. Look and write. - Read the text and look at the pictures (p71). Then - Guide Ss to look at the guess possible words or phrases to complete the pictures and complete the text sentences. - Complete the excercise in individually. - Monitor the activity and offer - Ss check each other for correction. help if necessry. - 3 Ss write the answers on the board, 6-7 Ss read - Check as a class. aloud the sentences they have written.The rest of the Reinforcement - homelink. class listen & give comments. - Have ss review the lesson and prepare the test. - Do at home.. V: Evaluation:. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(236) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 …………………………………………………………………………………….. ……………………….. ………………………………………………………………………. WEEK 35. Date of teaching: from 16/5 to 21 /5 /2016 Period 137 + 138 SUMMARY Period 139 + 140. TEST. WRITING TEST 4 Grade 4 Time: 40mins I. Listening Question 1: Listen and number (2.5 pts). 0 Question 2: Listen and draw a line (2.5 pts) 0 a. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(237) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4 e. Question 3: Listen and tick (2.5pts) 1.a. b.. 2. a.. 3.. b.. a.. b.. 56,000d 3. a.. 4.. 46,000d b.. a.. b.. Question 4: Listen and complete (2.5 pts) Nam: Look. That’s (0) ……… my sister. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(238) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 Linda: (1) …… one? What’s she wearing? Nam: She’s (2) ………… a T-shirt and ……..(3). Linda: Oh, I see. She has got brown (4) …………. II. Reading and writing(10pts) Question 5: Look and read. Put a tick() or a cross(x) in the box as examples. 1. This is a book .. x. . 1. There is a table . 1. I like giraffes because they are pretty.. 2. Why do you want to go to the bookshop ? – Because I want some books.. 3. She is wearing a blouse and jeans .. 4. I am going to play badminton. Question 6: Look and read and write Yes or No. There is one example. 00Ha Noi International School is in Hill street. ….No…….. 01. My mother is short and big.. 1.What are you going to do? - I’m going to have picnic.. ……Yes….... …………. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(239) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 2. My father likes singing. 3.A: I want to buy some food and drink. B: Let’ go to the supermarket.. ……………….. .………………. 4.Where did you go?- I went to Hanoi.. ........……….. Question 7: Look at the pictures and the letters. Write the words: 0. vgieall 1. v i l l a g e. 1.. ebra. 1._ _ _ _. 2. a m c i p ng. 2._ _ _ _ _ _ _. 3. soh e s. 3._ _ _ _ _. ookshpbo. 4._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. 4.. Question 8 : Complete the passage. It’s seven o’clock in the (0) morning. It’s very (1)________ outside. It is also cold and raining, so take an (2)_________with you. Wear warm clothes like scarf and (3)___________ today. It is also a good day for (4)_____________. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(240) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017. morning. flying a kite. hat. raincoat. umbrella. windy. CORRECTION OF WRITING TEST 4 I. Objectives - Help students to review all the structures they have learnt. - Student check and correct their writing test. - Ss look after , solve problems and study themselves. - Studious and obedient students and love their friends. II. Language focus: III. Resources: - Recording, tape and pictures, student’s book , Workbook , paper test. IV. Procedure: Part 1: Listening Q1: Listen and tick(2pt) 1B 2C 3A 4B Q2: Listen and write the words(1pt): 1. Sunday 3. fruit 2. Park 4. football Part 2:Reading and writing Q3: (1pt) 1x 2V 3x 4V Q4(1pt) 1.book s 2. Zoo 3. Tigers 4.doll. Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(241) Giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 4 - Năm học 2016 - 2017 V: Evaluation: …………………………………………………………………………………….. ……………………….. …………………………………………………………………....... Người thực hiện: Phạm Thị Lan.

(242)

GA TIENG ANH 4 4 TIET TUAN

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về